JP6685037B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin and operates a start lever, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces start to rotate and a stop button is operated. Then, the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped, and a privilege is awarded in accordance with the combination of the symbols displayed as a result, a gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when an operation to the start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”) is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is “internal winning”). Role)), the drive control of the stepping motor to start the rotation of a plurality of reels is performed, and when the operation to the stop button (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”) is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor Is controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, in a special game state (for example, MB game state), the maximum delay time (for example, maximum number of sliding pieces) in a specific display row is set to a first maximum delay time (for example, maximum delay time in the normal game state) (for example, A gaming machine that performs stop control is known as a second maximum delay time (for example, within 1 frame (75 ms)) shorter than 4 frames (within 190 ms) (Patent Document 1).

  According to this gaming machine, in the special gaming state, the maximum number of sliding pieces is reduced, so that the skill of the player is easily reflected in the game result, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

JP, 2010-125290, A

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, since the predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces does not exceed the first maximum delay time, the stop control in the normal gaming state becomes monotonous. There was a point.

  Although it is possible to freely set the maximum number of sliding pieces, in the gaming machine as shown in Patent Document 1, the fairness of the game is ensured by setting the maximum number of sliding pieces within a predetermined range. However, if the maximum number of sliding pieces is freely set, it becomes impossible to ensure the fairness of such a game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the expectation of lottery during a specific game state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is based on a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a player's start operation. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery processing by the main CPU 51) and the player's stop operation, which determines the internal winning combination. Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping fluctuation display (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the first gaming state. Then, in the first gaming state, when a specific transition condition is satisfied, gaming state transition control means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, In the first game state, a lock execution means capable of executing a lock for invalidating a game operation by the player, and a symbol production capable of performing a symbol effect in a variable display mode of the symbol during the lock execution by the lock execution means. The production execution means and the symbol production determination means for determining the symbol production executed by the symbol production execution means are provided, and the symbol production determination means, in the first game state, at least a specific symbol production and a predetermined symbol production. It is possible to determine a symbol effect to be executed from a plurality of symbol effects including the symbol effect, and the game state transition control means is determined to execute the specific symbol effect in the first game state. In this case, the game state is transferred to the second game state, and in the first game state, when it is determined to execute the predetermined symbol effect, The gaming state, a high-probability state it tends to be determined to perform the specific symbol effect, said specific symbol effect, first of symbols to perform the demonstration is executed in the unit game determined Including the effect and the second symbol effect executed in the next game of the unit game in which it is decided to execute the effect, the symbol effect determination means, in the final game in the first game state, It is characterized in that it is not possible to decide to execute the second symbol effect .

  According to the present invention, the expectation of lottery during the specific game state can be further improved.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where the movable part is in the initial position in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a state of a front panel in a state where a movable part is in a production position in a pachi-slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the front panel in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing an internal structure of a pachi-slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, with a front door opened. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the pachi-slot machine concerning embodiment of this invention is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states memorize | stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RB game states memorize | stored in the main ROM. It is a diagram showing a small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table stored in the main ROM. It is a diagram showing a bonus internal winning combination determination table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the stop operation sequence with respect to an internal winning combination, and a winning combination in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the push order small win in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, (b) shows the structure of the push order small win in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a push order small winning combination when it does not apply. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storage area assigned to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area allocated to in-RAM. It is a figure which shows the internal carryover combination storage area allocated to in-RAM. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area allocated to main RAM. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is the figure which shows the production game state storage area which is allotted to main RAM. It is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM. (A) is a pseudo game number lottery table stored in the main ROM, (b) is a pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM, (c) is a highly accurate transfer lottery table stored in the main ROM, ( FIG. 9D is a diagram showing a high-secure obstacle game number random determination table stored in the main ROM, and FIG. 8E is a pseudo-probability change state end random determination table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the reel action random determination table for the fixed winning combinations stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the mode suggestion production lottery table memorize | stored in the sub ROM. It is a diagram showing a remaining game number suggestive effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the example of estimation of the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggestive effect in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the in-AT point addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the number-of-ATs addition lottery table during the addition state stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in the addition state memorize | stored in sub ROM. It is a diagram showing an example of reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action excitation output table memorize | stored in the main ROM. It is the figure which shows one example of the production design position search data which is remembered in main ROM. It is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a game in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 43 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. 43 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process in a pseudo probability variation state performed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the lottery processing during normal game which is executed in the lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a game start time lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo game process performed in the game start time lock execution process shown in FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a state management process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an AT state management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. 52 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. 42 is a flowchart showing a game end time lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the input port check process performed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the communication data transmission process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed in the interruption processing shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the reel production control processing which is executed in the reel control processing which is shown in Figure 58. It is the flowchart which shows the reel production adjustment output processing which is executed in the reel production control processing which is shown in Figure 59. It is the flowchart which shows the reel production adjustment output processing which is executed in the reel production control processing which is shown in Figure 59. It is the flowchart which shows the production design position renewal processing which is executed in the reel production adjustment output processing which is shown in Figure 60 and Figure 61. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in the mother task activated in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 66. It is a flow chart which shows production contents determination processing performed in command analysis processing shown in Drawing 67. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process which is executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an on-addition state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a pseudo probability variation state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the process in normal games performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of AT rushing performed in the process during normal games shown in FIG. 72, and the process at the time of lock command reception shown in FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing lock command reception processing executed in the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 68. 69 is a flowchart showing a winning operation command reception process which is executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing lock lottery processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. 42 is a flowchart showing a game start time lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of stop operation continuation suggestion production which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

  A pachi-slot machine, which is a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

[Function flow of pachi-slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a pachi-slot machine (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is set in advance when a player inserts a medal and a start lever (for example, a start lever 16 described later) is operated. One value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in the range of numerical values (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 51 described later) performs the lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means determines a predetermined combination from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever by the start switch (for example, a start switch 16S described later) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). The internal winning combination is determined by the winning probability.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the pay line is determined. In addition, as the type of the combination of symbols, there are those related to "winning", in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonus, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "miss". And related items are provided.

In addition, the pachi-slot machine can control the progress of the game to be stopped. Such control is called "freeze" or "lock". For the sake of convenience, the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "game start lock", and the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the end of game is called "lock at the end of game". Call. That is, the "game start lock" means that the operation of the stop button (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R described later) is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. In a sense, it is a control to stop the progress of the game, and "lock at the end of game" means to operate the bet button or the start lever for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. Is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that is not effective.
Of course, the trigger of the “freeze” or the “lock” is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever 16 is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, after that, in a predetermined period, The control may be performed such that the operation of is not effective.

  In addition, the internal winning combination determination means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines whether to perform “freeze” or “lock” instead of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. Good. At that time, a plurality of random number values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random number values, and "freeze" or "lock" is performed based on the other random number value. It may be determined whether or not.

  Subsequently, when a stop button is pressed by the player after a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later) are rotated, reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 62 described later). The stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, which will be described later, perform control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. When the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 4 symbols, and when the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 1 symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these and can be set as appropriate.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination which permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the winning line (hereinafter, the winning line in which the symbol combination is validated is utilized by using the specified time. The rotation of the reel is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is displayed as much as possible along the "effective line".

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the specified time is used to reel in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is not displayed along the effective line. Stop rotating.

  Further, the reel stop control means, when the determined internal winning combination is to change the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with the predetermined stop operation sequence, the predetermined stop operation sequence also With reference to this, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel.

  In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line, when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) on the pachi-slot machine.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation that is performed first when all reels are rotating is the first stop operation, and the stop operation that is performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation and the second stop operation. The stop operation performed after the second stop operation is called the third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine, various effects are performed by the effect executing means (notifying means) in the above-described series of flows. These effects are displayed by a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later), an output of light performed by a lamp (for example, a lamp group 21 described later), and speakers (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later). Is performed by outputting the sound or a combination thereof.

  When the player operates the start lever, in addition to the random number value used to determine the above-mentioned internal winning combination, other lottery processing, for example, a random number value for production (hereinafter, a random number value for production) is extracted. It

  When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means (for example, the sub CPU 81 described later) randomly determines the effect content to be executed this time from among a plurality of kinds of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the effect execution means is interlocked with each trigger, such as when the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when the presence / absence of a prize is determined. And perform the performance.

  In this way, on the pachi-slot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided and the interest of the player is improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 3 is a front panel of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a state where a movable part is at an initial position. 4 is a front view of the state of FIG. 4, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the state of the front panel in a state where the movable part is in the effect position in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a front panel of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 6 shows an internal structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view in the state where the door opened.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 is a game machine that uses a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, or a token, and a card or the like that stores information on a game value given to or given to a player. However, in the following description, it is assumed that a medal is used.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that is a main body that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both sides of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that is used when carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3) showing a specific example of a display device, and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet 2a. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel main body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel main body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, an image is displayed and an effect is executed by using the entire display portion 11a including the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided in. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged continuously among the plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is stopped. The size is set so that three symbols can be displayed. That is, in the frames of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Further, in the present embodiment, a line (center line) connecting the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle area of the right reel 3R is set as a winning line for determining whether or not there is a prize. Define.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper portion of the door body 9 and is sized to cover the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to overlap with the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11 and covers a decorative frame 101 having a panel opening 101a that exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a front surface of the decorative frame 101. It has a protective cover 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 5).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative frame 101 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a panel opening 101a. The decorative frame 101 has an upper frame portion 111, a lower frame portion 112, a left frame portion 113, and a right frame portion 114. The decorative frame 101 is formed such that a pattern is formed on the surface by mixing a mixture with a resin and injection molding. In order to form a pattern on the surface by such molding, for example, the position of the injection gate or the like may be adjusted.

  The upper frame portion 111 is provided with a plurality of upper engagement holes 111a that open to the front. The openings of the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a are each formed in a horizontally long rectangle. Upper engaging pieces 126 of the protective cover 102, which will be described later, are inserted into the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a.

  Further, the left frame portion 113 is provided with a plurality of left engaging holes 113a opening forward, and the right frame portion 114 is provided with a plurality of right engaging holes 114a opening forward. The openings of the plurality of left engagement holes 113a and the plurality of right engagement holes 114a are each formed in a vertically long rectangle. A left engaging piece 127 and a right engaging piece 128 of the protective cover 102, which will be described later, are inserted into the plurality of left engaging holes 113a and the right engaging holes 114a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the protective cover 102 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin, and includes a front surface portion 121 facing forward, an upper surface portion 122 facing upward, and a lower surface portion 123 facing downward. , And a left side surface portion 124 and a right side surface portion 125 that face the sides.

  Switch notches 121a and 121b for exposing effect switches 22L and 22R, which will be described later, are formed in the lower portion of the front surface 121. These switch notches 121a and 121b are formed in an arc shape corresponding to the outer shapes of the effect switches 22L and 22R.

  A plurality of upper engaging pieces 126 are provided on the end surface of the upper surface portion 122. The plurality of upper engagement pieces 126 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane that is substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction, and have flexibility. In addition, engaging projections 126a are provided on the upper surfaces (one flat surface) of the plurality of upper engaging pieces 126.

  When the upper engaging pieces 126 are inserted into the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a of the decorative frame 101, the engaging protrusions 126a engage with the upper frame portion 111 of the decorative frame 101, and the protective cover 102 comes off from the decorative frame 101. You can avoid it.

  The left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 of the protective cover 102 are continuous with the front surface portion 121 at an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. As a result, the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 have a protruding piece 124A and a protruding piece 125A that protrude further forward than the front surface portion 121. The end surfaces of the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 facing the front are end surfaces on the side of the protruding piece 124A and the protruding piece 125A, and are formed in an arc shape so that the central portion protrudes most forward.

  In addition, a plurality of right engaging pieces 128 are provided on the end surface of the right side surface portion 125 that faces rearward. Note that the left side surface portion 124 is provided with a plurality of left engagement pieces 127 (not shown) similarly to the right engagement piece 128 of the right side surface portion 125. The plurality of left engaging pieces 127 and the plurality of right engaging pieces 128 are formed in a flat plate shape having a plane that is substantially orthogonal to the left-right direction.

  A decorative portion 125a is provided on the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion 125a is formed by subjecting a part of the outer surface of the right side surface portion 125 to embossing. The decorative portion 125a emits light by receiving light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided in the interior of the right engaging hole 114a of the decorative frame 101. In the right side surface portion 125, a region where the decoration portion 125a is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  Further, the left side surface portion 124 is provided with a decoration portion (not shown) similar to the decoration portion 125a of the right side surface portion 125. A decoration portion (not shown) of the left side surface portion 124 receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided in the interior of the left engagement hole 113a of the decoration frame 101 and emits light. In the left side surface portion 124, a region where the decoration portion is not provided is a light transmitting portion that transmits light.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b in FIG. The lamp group 21 includes LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents. The effect switches 22L and 22R are provided on the left and right side portions of the decorative frame 101, respectively.

  A central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, and a right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

  The central movable unit 105 is arranged in the upper central portion inside the decorative frame 101, and has a movable component 309 described later. The central movable unit 105 rotates the movable part 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) around a shaft extending in the left-right direction and from below the decorative cover 364, for example, when a specific effect is performed. Lower it. As a result, the movable component 309 moves to the effect position (see FIG. 4) that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the movable part 309 is composed of a character part 323, an arch cover 324, and a light emitting display part 325. When the movable part 309 is placed in the effect position, the character part 323 and the arch cover 324. The light emitting display unit 325 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. Although not shown, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are individually formed with transmissive regions for transmitting light emitted from LEDs (not shown) provided on their back surfaces. There is. In particular, the light emitting display unit 325 is formed with a plurality of (for example, three) transmissive regions arranged in parallel so as to perform a plurality of steps (for example, three steps) of lighting display in a stepwise manner.

  The left movable unit 106 is arranged on the left side in the decorative frame 101, and has a left door 188 described later. The right movable unit 107 is arranged on the right side in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189 described later. The left door 188 and the right door 189 are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape having an appropriate thickness, and one of the flat surfaces faces the front in the initial position.

  The left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) around an axis extending in the vertical direction when a predetermined effect is performed, for example. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction when, for example, a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, either the left door 188 or the right door 189 may be rotated or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated when a predetermined effect is performed. Good.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a pedestal portion 13 is formed on the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with various devices to be operated by the player (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button 18). ing.

  The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals that are dropped by the player from the outside onto the pachi-slot machine 1. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the predetermined number can be deposited in the pachi-slot machine 1 (so-called credit). function).

  The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 to be used for one game. The payment button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 7) including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). Display digitally.

  A medal payout opening 24, a medal tray 25, speakers 20L, 20R, etc. are provided at the bottom of the door body 9. The medal payout opening 24 guides the medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects and music such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the cabinet 2a is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side opened. A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 7) described later is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of presence / absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in a central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 6, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 7) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter, referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. Further, a power supply device 4 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided on one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 2a. .

  A sub-board 32 that constitutes a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) to be described later is provided on an upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (a portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of an effect such as display of an image. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, etc. of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) are proper, and the medals determined to be proper are hoppers. I will guide you to 33. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path of the medal in the selector 35.

[Circuit Structure of Pachi-Slot Machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows an internal configuration of a sub control circuit in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other constituent elements, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Including 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. . The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 also generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches, sensors and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S detects that the player has pressed each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R (stop operation). The start switch 16S detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the player has pressed the settlement button.

  The medal sensor 35S detects that the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 have passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) is pressed by the player.

  Further, as the peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls driving of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum thereof is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times that a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to determine the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many symbols the reel has. Just manage).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 17 times) required to rotate one symbol, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is changed to " 1 ”is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects the reel index.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols are rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. In addition, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside has reached a predetermined payout number. To do.

  Although not shown, an external concentrated terminal board is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. The external centralized terminal board receives signals such as the number of inserted / dispensed medals from the main control circuit 41, the number of games played, and bonus operation presence / absence information, and displays these signals on the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output as an external signal to an external display or a host computer in a game arcade. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachi-slot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

<Sub control circuit>
As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as effect content determination and execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable unit. It includes a unit drive circuit 98 and a rotating lamp drive circuit 99.

  The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 according to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number value for performance is extracted to determine the content of the performance (performance data), and A performance registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined performance contents, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, sound data regarding BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on / off light.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the decided effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L and 20R, a lamp group 21, a central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, a right movable unit 107, and a rotating lamp 543. Peripheral devices such as are connected. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including a frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is the liquid crystal display device 11. Displayed by.

  Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the effect contents.

  The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data designated by the contents of the effect. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven to move the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 when a specific effect is performed.

  Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 in accordance with the right movable unit drive data designated by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 81 and the rotating light drive circuit 99 drive the rotating light 543 in accordance with the rotating light drive data specified by the effect contents.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 is in a state of notifying a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player according to the determined internal winning combination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. An advantageous game state control means for controlling the state is configured. Such an advantageous game state is referred to as "AT".

[Change of game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. As the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 is adapted to shift between two gaming states, a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and a BB gaming state (RB gaming state).

<Change of general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 51 takes either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state as the general gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, when the internal winning of the bonus combination (BB in the present embodiment) which is the bonus winning combination is made, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  The RT0 game state is a replay low-probability state (low RT game state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination that is the re-playing combination is relatively lower than that of the RT1 game state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, there is no direct transition from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, but in the RT1 gaming state, winning the BB, shifting to the BB gaming state, and ending the BB gaming state, the RT0 gaming state again It will be moved.

  In addition, the BB is always in a state of being internally won from the time of winning internally until winning the prize. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "BB carryover state". That is, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the BB carryover state have an equivalent relationship.

  Note that the RT1 game state is not a RT managed by the number of games, but a game state that shifts only when the above-described shift condition is satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 game state is infinite RT.

<Change of BB game state>
Further, the main CPU 51 shifts the game state to the BB game state when the BB wins. In the present embodiment, the BB game state is always controlled during the RB game state, and when the BB end condition is satisfied, specifically, the specified number of sheets in the BB game state (75 sheets in the present embodiment). ), The BB gaming state and the RB gaming state are ended, and the RT0 gaming state is entered.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in an internal lottery table for general game state which will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, in the RT1 game state, any internal winning combination is always determined by lottery. That is, the unit game that is in the BB carryover state and has not won any of the small winning combinations or the replay roles will occur only in the unit game internally winning the BB. Further, the internal winning combination can be roughly divided into a replay combination, a small combination, and a bonus combination. However, as shown in FIG. 19 described later, in the present embodiment, the replay combination and the small combination are smaller than the BB. It is configured to be preferentially stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, if the BB is won internally, but the BB cannot be won in the unit game, until a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, full storage due to backup error of main RAM 33 at power-on). Initialization of the area) The RT1 gaming state will continue.

  The transition of the game state is not limited to the above. For example, a plurality of combinations of the design of bell lip to be described later are provided, and at the time of winning of the normal lip 1 to 4 or bell lip 1 to 4 described later, the combination of the symbols to be won is made different depending on the stop operation order, and thus the design of one bell lip. When the combination of the winning combination is won, it may be configured to shift to the RT1 gaming state described above, and when the combination of the symbols of the other bellips is winning, it may be configured to shift to the RT0 gaming state described above.

  In this case, when the sub CPU 81 is controlled to the advantageous game state, first, the stop operation order in which the combination of the one bellip symbol will be won is notified, and the stop operation is performed according to this notification, Transition from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Then, in the RT1 gaming state, the stop operation order in which the other combination of Bell Lip symbols is not won is notified, and the stop operation order in which the payout of the medal is highest is notified for the winning of each small winning combination. By doing so, similarly, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player can be configured.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines a correspondence relationship between 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol position data “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As the types of symbols, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank" Is included.

  Here, the “watermelon A”, the “watermelon B”, and the “watermelon C” need only be distinguishable by the main CPU 51 as internally different symbols, and in the present embodiment, like the same symbols. The pattern should be recognizable by the player. Hereinafter, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “watermelon C” are also collectively referred to as “watermelon”.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, distinguished by 2 bytes (16 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents a symbol code as data for specifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 has been described as indicating the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 52. The symbol arrangement table that is shown represents an arrangement of symbol codes that identify the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 are "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "as described above. There are 10 types of watermelon C, white blank and purple blank.

  In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as the symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Further, "2" is assigned as the symbol code for the "BAR" symbol. Further, "3" is assigned as the symbol code for the "replay" symbol.

  Similarly, “4” to “10” are used as the symbol codes for the symbols “bell”, “cherry”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, “watermelon C”, “white blank” and “purple blank”, respectively. It is assigned.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the winning operation flag and the number of payouts are associated with the symbol combination identified by the storage area identification data represented by 27 bytes.

The winning operation flag is data assigned corresponding to a unique symbol combination for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “winning combination”), and includes 1-byte (8-bit) data and a storage area type. I'm out. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data.
The 1-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. Each symbol combination is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  Note that, in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the names (contents) of the winning combinations are associated with the winning action flags for the combinations of the symbols, for easy understanding of the invention.

  The payout number is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player, corresponding to each symbol combination. When the combination of symbols arranged along the activated line coincides with the “combination of symbols” in the symbol combination table, the medal discharge by driving the hopper device 33 or the number of credits is counted based on the corresponding payout number. The credit counter to be added is added.

  FIG. 12 shows a symbol combination table relating to the bonus combination. When a combination of symbols of "watermelon B-BAR-white blank" representing a winning combination called "BB" is displayed along the activated line in the normal gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the medal is displayed. There is no payout, but it means that you have won the BB. That is, in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), if "BB" is won, the game is transferred to the BB gaming state.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table relating to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed along the activated line, it means that there is no payout of medals, but that the winning combination of the replay is won. That is, when the replay combination is won, the replay can be performed in the next game.

  In FIG. 13, when a combination of symbols "Replay-Replay-Replay" representing a winning combination called "middle rip" is displayed along the activated line, "middle rip" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Replay" is available.

  When a combination of symbols of "Bell-Replay-Red 7" that represents a winning combination called "Cross-up rep 1" is displayed along the activated line, it goes up to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Replay" is available. The same applies to "cross-up rep 1" as to "cross-up rep 2" to "cross-up rep 4".

  When a combination of the symbols "Watermelon A-Replay-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Crossdown Lip 1" is displayed along the activated line, the display window 4L, 4C, 4R is moved downward to the right. "Replay" is available. The same applies to "Crossdown Lip 2" to "Crossdown Lip 6" as well as "Crossdown Lip 1".

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay-Bell-Cherry" that represents a winning combination called "Bell Lip" is displayed along the activated line, "Bells" are aligned in the lower right direction in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is the effective line, but the combination of symbols relating to the replay combination is configured as shown in FIG. 13, and will be described later in the description of FIG. By assembling the combinations of the symbols related to the small role (for example, the upper bells 1 to 12, the cross up bells 1 to 9, the lower bells 1 to 3 and the cross down watermelons 1 to 4, etc.), as if the five lines ( The center line aligned in the middle tier, the top line aligned in the upper tier, the bottom line aligned in the lower tier, the cross-down line aligned in the lower right, the cross-up line aligned in the upper right) are effective lines to impress the player. You can do it.

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay-Replay-Cherry", which represents a winning combination called "chance rep A1", is displayed along the activated line, "bell" is displayed on the upper stage of the display window 4L, and lower stage of the display window 4C. Is displayed on the display window 4R and "bell" is displayed on the lower side of the display window 4R. That is, two “bells” are displayed on at least one line (for example, a bottom line aligned on the lower stage or a crossdown line aligned on the lower right) of the above-mentioned five lines (hereinafter, “tempai”). The remaining one "bell" is displayed on another line (hereinafter, referred to as "tempai miss"). As for “Chance Lip A2” to “Chance Lip A5” and “Chance Lip B1” to “Chance Lip B3”, “bell” is removed from the tempo in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, similar to “Chance Lip A1”. Is displayed.

  When a combination of symbols "Bell-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "Special Lip A1" is displayed along the activated line, "Watermelon" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is displayed out of tempai. The same applies to "special lip A2" to "special lip A6" and "special lip B" as well as "special lip A1".

  When a combination of symbols "BAR-BAR-BAR" that represents a winning combination called "BAR Lip A" is displayed along the activated line, "BAR" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Get together. Further, when a combination of the symbols of "Replay-BAR-Cherry", which represents a winning combination called "BAR Lip E", is displayed along the activated line, it is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R ascending to the right. "BAR" may be available.

  When a combination of symbols "BAR-BAR-Watermelon A" that represents a winning combination called "BAR Lip B1" is displayed along the activated line, "BAR" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is displayed off. “BAR lip B2”, “BAR lip B3”, “BAR lip C”, “BAR lip D1”, and “BAR lip D2” are the same as “BAR lip B1”.

  When a combination of symbols "Bell-BAR-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "BAR Lip B4" is displayed along the activated line, "Replay" is displayed in the lower part of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. Are aligned. The same applies to "BAR Lip B5" and "BAR Lip B6" as to "BAR Lip B4".

  When a combination of symbols of "cherry-ANY-ANY" representing a winning combination called "cherry lip A" is displayed along the activated line, "cherry" is displayed in the middle part of the display window 4L. In addition, "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used. That is, in "Cherry Rep A", if "Cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, the winning combination is determined regardless of the symbols displayed in the display windows 4C and 4R. ing.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-red 7-cherry" representing a winning combination called "cherry lip B1" is displayed along the activated line, "red 7" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. May be displayed out of tempai, but basically, the pattern displayed when the "cherry" pattern in "cherry lip A" described above could not be displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. Is defined as a combination of. The “cherry lip B2” to “cherry lip B8” and “cherry lip C” are the same as the “cherry lip B1”.

  FIG. 14a and FIG. 14b show the symbol combination table relating to the small winning combination with the payout of medals. When the symbol combination shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b is displayed along the activated line, the payout number of medals associated with the symbol combination is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols "Replay-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "upper bell 1" is displayed along the activated line, "bell" is displayed in the upper row in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. ", And 7 medals will be paid out. The same applies to the "upper bell 1" as to the "upper bell 2" to "upper bell 12".

  When a combination of the symbols "Watermelon A-Bell-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Cross-up Bell 1" is displayed along the activated line, it rises to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. "Bells" are lined up and seven medals are paid out. The same applies to "cross-up bell 1" as to "cross-up bell 2" to "cross-up bell 9".

When a combination of symbols "BAR-BELL-REPLAY" representing a winning combination called "middle 1st2nd incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.
The “middle 1st2nd incorrect solution A1” to “middle 1st2nd incorrect solution A9” and the “middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B1” to “middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B9” are the same as the “middle 1st2nd incorrect solution A1”.

  Note that, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer” means, for example, when “middle left and right cross up bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as the “push order small win”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "middle left and right", any one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" is won and seven medals are paid out. However, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the "middle right left" stop operation sequence, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation of the second stop operation is correct. Since the order is incorrect, one of "Medium 1st2nd incorrect solution A1" to "Medium 1st2nd incorrect solution A9" is awarded and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-watermelon A-bell" representing a winning combination called "right 1st incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. “Right 1st incorrect solution A2” to “right 1st incorrect solution A4” and “right 1st incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st incorrect solution B4” are the same as “right 1st incorrect solution A1”.

  Note that, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “right 1st incorrect answer” means, for example, when the “middle left and right cross up bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as the “push order small combination”. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "middle left and right", any one of "cross-up bell 1" to "cross-up bell 9" is won and seven medals are paid out. However, if "right", that is, if the stop button 17R is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect. Therefore, when "missing" described below does not occur, "right 1st incorrect solution" Either "A1" to "right 1st incorrect solution A4" or "right 1st incorrect solution B1" to "right 1st incorrect solution B4" is won and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of "bell-bell-bell" symbols representing a winning combination called "middle bell" is displayed along the activated line, "bells" are arranged in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. , 7 medals will be paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon A-purple blank-bell" representing a winning combination called "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. The “right 1st2nd incorrect solution A2” to “right 1st2nd incorrect solution A6” and “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B6” are the same as the “right 1st2nd incorrect solution A1”.

  It should be noted that, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 19, the “right 1st2nd incorrect answer” means, for example, “right left middle middle bell 1” as the “push order small win”, and “right left When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "middle", the "middle bell" is won and seven medals are paid out, but the "right middle left" stop operation is performed. When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation order of the second stop operation is incorrect. Any one of the correct answer A1 to the right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6 is won, and one medal is paid out.

  However, for "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6", "middle left and right lower bell 1" to "middle left and right lower bell 3" and "middle right left lower bell 1" ~ If any of "middle right left lower stage bell 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "right", that is, if the stop button 17R is operated for the first stop, the stop operation order is incorrect. In this case, the “missing” to be described later does not occur, and any one of “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1” to “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B6” is won and one medal is paid out. Therefore, it can be said that, in the case of the above-mentioned internal winning combination, it is a “right 1st incorrect answer” except that a “missing” to be described later does not occur.

  Also, as the "pushing order small win", one of "Right left middle lower bell 1" to "Right left middle lower bell 3", "Right middle left lower bell 1" to "Right middle left lower bell 3" as an internal winning combination If determined, "medium", that is, if the stop button 17C is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect, but in this case, the "missing" described below does not occur, Any one of "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6" will be won, and one medal will be paid out. Therefore, it can be said that, in the case of the above-mentioned internal winning combination, it is a “medium 1st incorrect answer” described below, except that a “missing failure” described below does not occur.

  When a combination of symbols of "bell-cherry-BAR" representing a winning combination called "middle 1st incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "medium 1st incorrect solution A1" to "medium 1st incorrect solution A4" and "medium 1st incorrect solution B1" to "medium 1st incorrect solution B4".

  Note that, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 19, the "middle 1st incorrect answer" means, for example, "right left middle middle bell 1" as the "pushing order small win" is determined as the "right left left win". If the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation sequence of "middle", the "middle bell" will be won and seven medals will be paid out, but "middle", that is, the stop button 17C. When the first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order becomes an incorrect answer. Therefore, when a “missing error” described later does not occur, “medium 1st incorrect answer A1” to “medium 1st incorrect solution A4”, or “ This shows that any one of "Medium 1st incorrect answer B1" to "Medium 1st incorrect answer B4" is won and one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "Watermelon A-Replay-Cherry" representing a winning combination called "lower bell 1" is displayed along the activated line, "bell" is displayed in the lower row in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. And 7 medals will be paid out. The “lower bell 2” and the “lower bell 3” are the same as the “lower bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "red 7-watermelon A-bell" that represents a winning combination called "crossdown watermelon 1" is displayed along the activated line, the display window 4L, 4C, 4R is lowered to the right. "Watermelon" is complete and 3 medals are paid out. The “crossdown watermelon 2” to “crossdown watermelon 4” are the same as the “crossdown watermelon 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon B-watermelon A-watermelon A" representing a winning combination called "middle watermelon 1" is displayed along the activated line, "in the middle row in the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R" "Watermelon" is complete and three medals are paid out. The same applies to "middle watermelon 2" to "middle watermelon 6" as "middle watermelon 1".

  When a combination of symbols "BAR-cherry-white blank" representing a winning combination called "corner cherry A1-1" is displayed along the activated line, "cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4L. Then, three medals are paid out. "Corner Cherry A1-2" to "Corner Cherry A1-8", "Corner Cherry B1-1" to "Corner Cherry B1-4", "Corner Cherry B2-1" to "Corner Cherry B2-24", and "Corner" "Cherry B3-1" to "Corner Cherry B3-4", "Corner Cherry B4-1" to "Corner Cherry B4-3", "Corner Cherry B5-1" to "Corner Cherry B5-4", and "Corner Cherry C1" -1 "to" Corner Cherry C1-8 "," Corner Cherry C2-1 "to" Corner Cherry C2-12 "," Corner Cherry C3-1 "to" Corner Cherry C3-6 "," Corner Cherry C4-1 " Also for "Corner Cherry C4-3", "Cherry" is displayed in the upper row or the lower row in the display window 4L, similar to "Corner Cherry A1-1".

  When a combination of symbols of "watermelon B-bell-bell" that represents a winning combination called "special combination A" is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “special combination B” and “special combination C” as in “special combination A”.

  Here, the "special combination" cannot win any of the above-mentioned "corner cherries" when "weak cherry", "strong cherry 1", and "strong cherry 2" are determined as internal winning combinations. In this case, that is, when "cherry" cannot be displayed in the upper or lower part of the display window 4L according to the timing of the stop operation, the "special combination" is preferentially displayed over the "BB". By performing the stop control, "BB" is defined as a combination of symbols for controlling not to win the prize.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, regarding the combination of the symbols relating to the replay combination and the combination of the symbols relating to the small combination, the above-mentioned names are given so that they can be distinguished from others, but the names are not necessarily the combinations of the symbols. It does not limit the role of.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a lottery value and a data pointer for each gaming state are associated with a winning number. The internal lottery table is normally stored in the main ROM 52 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, one internal lottery table will be used for description.

  In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning numbers, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative. Internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (so-called “carrying” has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (that is, the data pointer) will be determined. When the number of times of the determination process as to whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative exceeds the number of the winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is “miss”.

  The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of internal lottery tables are used properly to change the type of the internal winning combination and the winning probability determined, and as a result, the expectations held by the player are undulated.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay winning combination determining table shown in FIG. 17 and the bonus internal winning combination determining table shown in FIG. . As the data pointer, a small win / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  In addition, the method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method, and, for example, a lottery random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is used for lottery according to each lottery number. The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding the values and determining whether or not the result of the addition is a predetermined value (for example, whether or not the value is a predetermined value or more for each winning number).

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 15, the internal lottery table for general game state referred to in the general game state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers “1” to “45” in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are associated with the small win / replay data pointers “1” to “45”, respectively. The "(between BB flags)" in the RT1 gaming state is synonymous with the "BB carryover state" described above.

  The lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” and “46” are different between the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery values of the winning numbers “17” to “45” are the same. The winning number “46” is associated with “1” as the bonus data pointer, and when BB is determined as the internal winning combination, only BB is determined as the internal winning combination (independent winning). It is set.

  Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16" are summed, and the lottery value of the winning number "46" is set to "5851". ing. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state, when the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “16” are summed up, it is set to “14829”, which is set higher than in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery of the winning number “46”. The value is set to "0". That is, the lottery value corresponding to the difference of the winning number "46" is assigned to the lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16".

(Internal lottery table for RB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the RB gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the RB gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RB gaming state. In the RB gaming state internal lottery table, the winning numbers "1" and "2" are associated with the small win / replay data pointers "46" and "47", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the BB gaming state is always in the RB gaming state, the RB gaming state internal lottery table can be rephrased as the BB gaming state internal lottery table.

<Internal winning combination determination table for small wins and replays>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, data for identifying a combination of winning symbols (winning action flag) is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted from the small winning / replaying data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination, It is associated with the name (remark) of the internal winning combination.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 17, one data pointer is associated with a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) in which winning is permitted, so that one internal lottery process allows a plurality of combinations. It is possible to allow winning of a combination of symbols (winning operation flag). These internal lottery methods are called “simultaneous winning” method and “overlapping winning” method.

  In the present embodiment, one symbol combination (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted can be defined as an “internal winning combination”, and winning is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination as one unit, but in FIGS. 17 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determining table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “0” is associated with “miss”.

  In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “1” indicates “normal rep 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win. As the (winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "cross-up lip 1-4", "cross-down lip 1-6" and "bell lip" are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “2” indicates “normal rep 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), “middle-stage lip”, “cross-up lip 1-4”, “cross-down lip 1-6”, “bell lip”, and “special lip A1-6” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “3” indicates “normal rep 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), "middle-stage lip", "cross-up lip 1-4", "cross-down lip 1-6", "bell lip", and "special lip B" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “4” indicates “normal rep 4” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), "middle-stage lip", "cross-up lip 1-4", "cross-down lip 1-6", "bell lip", "special lip A1-6" and "special lip B" are associated with each other. Has been.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer “5” indicates “Bell Rep 1” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip" and "bell lip" are associated with each other.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer “6” indicates “Bell Rep 2” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "bell lip", and "special lip A1-6" are associated.

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “7” indicates “Bell Rep 3” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "bell lip" and "special lip B" are associated.

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “8” indicates “Bell Rep 4” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols which is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "bell lip", "special lip A1-6" and "special lip B" are associated.

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “9” indicates “chance rep 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As “winning action flag”, “chance rep A1 to 5” and “chance rep B1 to 3” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer “10” indicates “chance rep 2” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is allowed. As "winning action flag", "chance rep A1-5", "chance rep B1-3" and "bell rep" are associated.

  In addition, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer “11” indicates “strong chance rep” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is allowed. As the (winning operation flag), "middle stage lip", "special lip A1-6" and "special lip B" are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “12” indicates “cherry rep” as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination of symbols ( "BAR Lips B1-6", "BAR Lips C", "BAR Lips D1, 2", "BAR Lips E", "Cherry Lips A", and "Cherry Lips B1-8" are associated as winning operation flags). Has been.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "13" indicates "strong cherry rep" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "BAR Lip B1-6", "BAR Lip C", "BAR Lip D1, 2", "BAR Lip E", "Cherry Lip A", "Cherry Lip B1-8", " "BAR Lip A" and "Cherry Lip C" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “14” indicates “BAR REP 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win. As "winning action flag", "middle-stage rep", "cross-up rep 1-4", "BAR rep A", "BAR rep B1-6", "BAR rep C" and "BAR rep D1,2" correspond It is attached.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “15” indicates “BAR REP 2” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to be won. As (winning operation flag), "middle-stage lip", "cross-up lip 1-4", "BAR lip A", "BAR lip B1-6", "BAR lip C", "BAR lip D1, 2", " "Bell lip" and "BAR lip E" are associated with each other.

  In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “16” indicates “fake BAR rep” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (winning operation flag), "middle-stage lip", "cross-up lip 1-4" and "BAR lip D1, 2" are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “17” indicates “middle left / right cross up bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 1", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated. .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “18” indicates “middle left / right cross up bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 2", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated. .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “19” indicates “middle left / right cross up bell 3” as an internal winning, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 3", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated. .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “20” indicates “middle right left cross up bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 4", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated. .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “21” indicates “middle right left cross up bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 5", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect solution B1-4" are associated. .

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “22” indicates “middle right left cross up bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 6", "cross-up bells 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated. .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “23” indicates “right / left middle / middle bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 7", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect solution A1-4" are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "24" indicates "right / left middle / middle bell 2" as an internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 8", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect solution A1-4" are associated.

  Also, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “25” indicates “Right, Left, Middle, Middle Bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 9", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect solution A1-4" are associated.

  Also, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "26" indicates "Right Middle Left Middle Bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 10", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect solution B1-4" are associated.

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "27" indicates "Right, Middle, Left, Middle Bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 11”, “middle bell”, “right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6” and “middle 1st incorrect solution B1-4” are associated.

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "28" indicates "Right Middle Middle Left Bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bell 12", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect solution B1-4" are associated.

  Also, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “29” indicates the “middle left and right lower bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 1 and 2", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6". .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “30” indicates “middle left / right lower bell 2” as an internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 3 and 4", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6". .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “31” indicates the “middle left / right lower bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 5 and 6", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 9", and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6". .

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “32” indicates the “middle right lower left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 7 and 8", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9", and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6". .

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “33” indicates the “middle right lower left bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 9 and 10", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6". .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “34” indicates “middle right lower left bell 3” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 11 and 12", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 9" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answers B1 to 6". .

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “35” indicates “Right Left Middle Lower Bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 1 and 2", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6".

  In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "36" indicates "Right Left Middle Lower Bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. Are associated with "upper bells 3, 4", "lower bells 1-3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1-6".

  In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "37" indicates "Right Left Middle Lower Bell 3" as an internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 5, 6", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer "38" indicates "Right Middle Lower Left Bell 1" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), “upper bells 7, 8”, “lower bells 1 to 3” and “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer "39" indicates "Right Middle Lower Left Bell 2" as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 9 and 10", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  In the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “40” indicates “Right Middle Lower Left Lower Bell 3” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As the symbol combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 11 and 12", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6" are associated.

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “41” indicates “strong bell” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols which is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "upper bells 1-12", "cross-up bells 1-9", and "lower bells 1-3" are associated.

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “42” indicates “watermelon” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols (prize winning) As operation flags, "crossdown watermelons 1 to 4" and "middle watermelons 1 to 6" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “43” indicates “weak cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to win ( As the winning operation flag), "corner cherry A1-1-8", "corner cherry B3-1-4", "corner cherry C1-1-8", "corner cherry C2-1-12", "corner cherry C3" "-1 to 6", "corner cherry C4-1 to 3", "special combination A", "special combination B" and "special combination C" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations / replays, the small winning / replaying data pointer “44” indicates “strong cherry 1” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), "corner cherry A1-1-8", "corner cherry B1-1-4", "corner cherry B2-1-24", "corner cherry B3-1-4", "corner cherry" "B4-1-3", "corner cherry B5-1-4", "corner cherry C2-1-12", "special combination A", "special combination B" and "special combination C" are associated with each other. .

  Further, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “45” indicates “strong cherry 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), "corner cherry A1-1-8", "corner cherry B1-1-4", "corner cherry B2-1-24", "corner cherry B3-1-4", "corner cherry" "B4-1-3", "corner cherry B5-1-4", "corner C2-1-12", "special combination A" and "special combination C" are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “46” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination A” as an internal winning combination, and the winning winning symbol is recognized. As a combination (winning action flag), "medium 1st2nd incorrect solution A1-9" is associated.

  In addition, in the small winning / replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning / replaying data pointer “47” indicates “RB medium / small winning combination B” as the internal winning combination, and the winning winning symbol is recognized. As a combination (winning operation flag), all small winning combinations (that is, a combination of all the symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b) are associated.

Here, referring to the internal lottery table for RB gaming state shown in FIG. 16, "RB medium / small combination A" corresponds to the winning number "1" and is internally won with a winning probability of 39425/65536.
On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of “medium 1st 2nd incorrect solution A1-9” associated with “RB medium / small combination A” is 2734 × 6/65536 = 16404. / 65536.

  Further, referring to the internal lottery table for RB gaming state shown in FIG. 16, "RB medium / small combination B" corresponds to the winning number "2" and is internally won with a winning probability of 16406/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability is the highest among the symbol combinations (winning operation flag) that are associated with “RB medium and small winning combination B” and that allow winning. Nos. Are “cross-up bells 1 to 9” corresponding to winning numbers “17” to “22” and “41”, and the winning probability is (2734 × 6 + 1) / 65536 = 16405/65536.

  Therefore, in the RB gaming state, the winning probability higher than that in the general gaming state, that is, the winning probability more advantageous to the player, is set for each symbol combination (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying the internal winning combination is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, for the sake of convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted from the bonus data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Note) is associated with.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “0” is associated with “miss”. In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "1" indicates "BB" as the internal winning combination, and as a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) in which winning is permitted, " "BB" is associated.

[Relationship between stop operation sequence for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the relationship between the stop operation sequence for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 19, as the stop operation sequence, “left middle right” means that the stop operation is performed in order of the stop button 17L, the stop button 17C, and the stop button 17R, and “left and right middle” means the stop button 17L, The stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R and the stop button 17C, and "middle left and right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17R. "Right and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 17C, stop button 17R, and stop button 17L, and "right and left middle" is performed in the order of stop button 17R, stop button 17L, and stop button 17C. "Right middle left" means stop button 17R, stop button 17C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 17L is made.

<Outline of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations permitted to win a prize are associated with one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 17L, 17C and 17R are operated (stop. The winning combination finally displayed may be controlled so as to change depending on the operation timing) and the order in which the operations are performed (stop operation order).

  That is, regarding which symbol combination will be the symbol combination finally displayed on the activated line (in other words, when the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control, as basic information), It is determined based on the three elements of.

  The first element is an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “miss” (the value of the small win / replay data pointer is “0”), a combination of symbols related to any replay combination or a combination of symbols related to a small win Will never be displayed on the active line.

  The second element is the stop operation timing of the player (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since four symbols are set as the maximum number of sliding pieces, even if one of the internal winning combinations has been won as a result of the internal lottery process, the winning is permitted. In the case where the symbols constituting the symbol combination being arranged exceed four symbols, the symbol combination for which winning is permitted may not be displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player. . This is called a so-called “missing”, and what is written as “or missing” in FIG. 19 means that this “missing” is present. Therefore, in the same figure, when it is not written as “or lost”, it means that there is no “missing” because at least one of the winning combinations is displayed. .

  The third element is the stop operation sequence of the player. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "normal rep 1" (the value of the small win / replay data pointer is "1"), no matter which stop operation sequence is used, regardless of the stop operation timing. , A combination of symbols relating to any replay combination is displayed on the activated line, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left / right cross up bell 1” (the value of the small win / replay data pointer is “17”), and the stop operation sequence is “middle left / right”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, any combination of symbols "Cross Up Bell 1-9" is displayed on the activated line, and when the stop operation sequence is "middle right left", regardless of the stop operation timing. , "Medium 1st2nd incorrect solution A1-9" will be displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, when the stop operation sequence is “left center right” or “left center right”, the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbols forming the combination of symbols of “upper bell 1” can be displayed on the activated line. Only when the combination of the symbols of "upper bell 1" is displayed on the activated line and the stop operation sequence is "right left middle" or "right middle left", the stop operation timing is "right 1st incorrect answer". Only when it is possible to display the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "A1 to 4" on the activated line, the symbol combination of any of the right 1st incorrect answers A1 to 4 "is indicated on the activated line. Is displayed.

  Here, the internal winning combination "middle left / right cross up bell 1" (small win / replay data pointer value is "17"), "middle left / right cross up bell 2" (small win / replay data pointer value is " 18 ")," Middle left / right cross-up bell 3 "(small win / replay data pointer value is" 19 ")," Middle left / right lower bell 1 "(small win / replay data pointer value is" 29 ") , "Middle left / right lower bell 2" (small win / replay data pointer value is "30") and "Middle left / right lower bell 3" (small win / replay data pointer value is "31") are stopped. Focusing on the operation sequence (see FIG. 19), they can be collectively referred to as “middle left and right bells” because they are common in that similar benefits can be given.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left and right bell”, only when the stop operation sequence is “middle left and right”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle left and right bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle left and right” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "middle right left cross-up bell 1" (small win / replay data pointer value is "20"), "middle right left cross up bell 2" (small win / replay data pointer value is "21" ”),“ Middle right left cross-up bell 3 ”(small win / replay data pointer value is“ 22 ”),“ Middle right left lower bell 1 ”(small win / replay data pointer value is“ 32 ”), "Center right left lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "33") and "middle right left lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "34") stop operation Focusing on the order (see FIG. 19), they are common in that similar profits can be given, and thus can be collectively referred to as “middle right left bell”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle right left bell", only when the stop operation sequence is "middle right left", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle right left bell", the stop operation sequence "middle right left" is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "Right, left, middle and middle bell 1" (small win / replay data pointer value is "23"), "Right, middle and middle bell 2" (small win / replay data pointer value is "24") , "Right Left Middle Middle Bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "25"), "Right Left Middle Lower Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "35"), "Right Left Middle" Lower bell 2 "(small win / replay data pointer value is" 36 ") and" right middle left lower bell 3 "(small win / replay data pointer value is" 37 ") is the stop operation sequence (Fig. 19), it is common in that similar profits can be given, and thus can be collectively referred to as “right-left center bell”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right-left-middle bell”, only when the stop operation sequence is “right-left-middle”, seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "Right, Left, Middle Bell", the stop operation sequence "Right, Left, Middle" is the procedure of the stopping operation that is most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “right middle left middle bell 1” (small win / replay data pointer value is “26”), “right middle left middle bell 2” (small win / replay data pointer value is 27 )), “Right middle left middle bell 3” (small win / replay data pointer value is “27”), “Right middle left lower bell 1” (small win / replay data pointer value is “38”) , "Right middle left lower bell 2" (small win / replay data pointer value "39") and "right middle left lower bell 3" (small win / replay data pointer value "40") Focusing on the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19), it is common in that similar profits can be given, and thus can be collectively referred to as “right center left bell”.

  That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "Right, Middle, Left, Bell", only when the stop operation sequence is "Right, Middle, Left", 7 medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Be done. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "Right Middle Left Bell", the stop operation sequence "Right Middle Left" is the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player.

  In this way, based on the above-mentioned third element, the internal winning combination in which the profit of the player fluctuates is called a so-called “push order combination”, and when it is a replay combination, it is called a “push order replay”. In the case of a small winning combination, it may be called a "pushing order small winning combination".

  In the present embodiment, in the AT, when "middle left and right bells", "middle right left bells", "right left middle bells" and "right middle left bells" which are "pushing order small wins" are determined as internal winning combinations. In addition, the stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out will be notified.

<Structure of push order small role>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration of the push-order small win in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 20 (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a push order small win in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a push order small win in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a push order small winning combination when the structure of is not applied.

  In addition, in FIG. 20A, "middle left and right bell A" conceptually means "middle left and right cross up bells 1 to 3" (small win / replay data pointer value is "17" to "19"). "Middle-right-left bell A" conceptually represents "middle-right-left cross-up bells 1 to 3" (small win / replay data pointer value "20" to "22"), and "right-left middle bell" “B” conceptually represents “Right, Middle, Middle Bells 1 to 3” (small win / replay data pointer values are “23” to “25”), and “Right, Middle, Left Bell B” is “Right, Middle, and Middle”. "Middle left and right bells 1-3" (values of small win / replay data pointers are "26" to "28") are conceptually expressed, and "middle left and right bells C" are "middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3" ( The value of the small win / replay data pointer is “29” to “31” conceptually, and “middle right left bell C” is “middle Right lower left bells 1 to 3 "(small win / replay data pointer values are" 32 "to" 34 ") are conceptually represented, and" right left middle bell C "is" right left middle lower bells 1 to 3 "( The value of the small win / replay data pointer conceptually represents "35" to "37", and "right middle left bell C" is "right middle left lower bell 1 to 3" (small win / replay data The value of the pointer conceptually represents “38” to “40”).

  In addition, in (a) of FIG. 20, as shown in FIG. 19, "no question one sheet" is "middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3" (the value of the small win / replay data pointer is "29" to "31". )), "Middle right left lower bells 1-3" (small win / replay data pointer values "32" to "34"), "right left middle lower bell 1-3" (small wins / replay data pointer "Middle 1st2nd incorrect solution B1-9" in values "35" to "37") and "Right middle left lower bells 1 to 3" (small win / replay data pointer values "38" to "40") And “right 1st2nd incorrect solution B1 to 6” are conceptually represented. In the same manner, "7 pieces of correct answer to pushing order right", "7 steps of correct answer to pushing order", "7 pieces of correct answer to pushing order", "7 pieces of correct answer to pressing position", "1 answer to correct pressing position" and The "first stop correct answer 1 sheet" also conceptually represents the winning combination shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 20 (b), "Right Left Middle Bell A" conceptually represents "Right Left Middle Cross Up Bells 1-3" if it is defined as an internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed. Only when the order is "middle right, left", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is won and seven medals are paid out. In addition, "Right-center-left bell A" is a conceptual representation of "right-center-left cross-up bells 1-3" if the internal winning combination is defined, and the stop operation sequence is "right-center-left". "," Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins one of the "cross-up bells 1-9" and pays out seven medals. Further, if the "middle left and right bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, it is a conceptual representation of "middle left and right middle bells 1 to 3", and the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right". Only, it means that regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins the "middle bell" and seven medals are paid out. If "middle right left bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, "middle right left middle bells 1 to 3" are conceptually represented, and the stop operation sequence is "middle right left". Only, it means that regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the player wins the "middle bell" and seven medals are paid out.

  Further, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, “correct answer to pressed position” means that the timing of the stop operation was appropriate, that is, “missing” occurred in the second element described above. It indicates that the stop operation was performed without performing. For example, when the stop operation order is "left center right" or "left center right", the "stop position correct answer upper 7 sheets" indicates that the stop operation timing is "the upper bells 1 to 12". Only when it is possible to display the symbols forming the combination of the symbols related to the "upper bell" (winning is permitted) on the activated line, the winning "winning bell is permitted" The symbol combination “” is displayed on the activated line, and 7 medals are paid out.

  In addition, in (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, "(1/4)" or "(1/2)" means a symbol on at least one reel among the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Due to the arrangement, when a stop operation is performed on the one reel at a predetermined stop operation timing at which one predetermined symbol is displayed, another predetermined not to be displayed at the predetermined stop operation timing. When there are symbols, it represents the number of these predetermined symbols (in other words, the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing).

  For example, when considering the "upper bells 1 to 12" as one group, in the reel 3L, the "replay" symbol is arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and in the reel 3R. , "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B" and "Watermelon C" symbols (one symbol group) are arranged so as to be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, in the reel 3C, "watermelon A" (corresponding to "upper bells 1 to 3"), "watermelon C (corresponding to" upper bells 4 to 6 ")," white blank "(" upper bells 7 to 9 ") "Corresponding to", "red 7" (corresponding to "upper bell 10-12") is the above-mentioned predetermined symbol, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing to display one of these symbols, the stop It is arranged so that other symbols are not displayed at the operation timing. That is, on the reel 3C, the predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is four (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  In addition, for example, when considering "medium 1st incorrect answers A1 to A4" and "medium 1st incorrect answers B1 to B4" as one group, in the reel 3L, "bell" and "watermelon B" symbols (one symbol group) ) Is arranged so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and in the reel 3C, the "cherry" symbol is arranged so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. There is. On the other hand, in the reel 3R, "BAR" (corresponding to "Medium 1st incorrect solution A1, A3"), "Watermelon A" (corresponding to "Medium 1st incorrect solution A2, A4"), "Watermelon B" ("Medium 1st Corresponding to incorrect answers B1 and B3) and "red 7" (corresponding to "Medium 1st incorrect answer B2 and B4") are the above-mentioned predetermined symbols, and stop at the stop operation timing for displaying any of these symbols. When an operation is performed, it is arranged so that other symbols are not displayed at the stop operation timing. That is, on the reel 3R, the predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is two (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

  Here, comparing (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, the number of internal winning combinations is eight in FIG. 20 (a), while the number of internal winning combinations is eight in FIG. 20 (b). The number of winning combinations will be 12, and the number of internal winning combinations will be increased by 4. Further, in FIG. 20 (a), when the total of the lottery values of the desired push order small winning combination is to be "4000" (that is, when the lottery value of "1000" is to be assigned to the correct push order) ), The lottery value is evenly assigned, whereas in FIG. 20B, the desired lottery value described above cannot be evenly assigned.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push-order small winning combination according to the present embodiment, the number of internal winning combinations is not increased without monotonous the outcome (combination of the symbols displayed) in the push-order small winning combination. By reducing the amount of data, it is possible to reduce the control load of the internal lottery process, and moreover, it becomes easy to evenly assign a desired lottery value. It will also contribute to this.

  In addition, in (a) of FIG. 20, the lottery values (for example, “250”) of “middle left and right bell C”, “middle right left bell C”, “right left middle bell C” and “right middle left bell C” are set. , "Middle left and right bell A", "Middle right and left bell A", "Right left middle bell B" and "Right middle left bell B" Instead of lowering the lottery value (for example, "750"), "C", "Middle Right Left Bell C", "Right Left Middle Bell C" or "Right Middle Left Bell C" is won even if the stop operation order becomes incorrect due to any stop operation order. 20 ”does not occur, and“ one question is won ”and one medal is paid out, whereas in FIG. 20B, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation is incorrect. As long as they are there, there is always the possibility of “missing”.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small win according to the present embodiment, in the push order small win that relatively lowers the lottery value, even if the stop operation sequence becomes an incorrect answer, By giving the minimum profit to the player, as a result, the bias of the profit given to the player can be reduced, which contributes to the fairness of the game.

  The configuration of the push-order small winning combination according to the present embodiment has been described above with reference to FIG. 20, but the configuration of the push-order small winning combination according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration of the push order subordinate combination according to the present embodiment, when the stop operation order is “left center right” or “left center right”, there is no case where the correct order of the push order is provided. It may be possible to provide a correct answer.

  In this case, "left center right bell D" and "left right center bell D" are defined, and when the "left center right bell D" is won, the stop operation sequence is "left center right" only. Regardless of the timing, if one of the "upper bells 1-12" is won and seven medals are paid out, and the stop operation sequence is "left-right middle" when the "right-left middle bell D" is won. Only in this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the “upper bells 1 to 12” may be won and seven medals may be paid out. In addition, "left center right bell C" and "left right center bell C" are defined, and when "left center right bell C" is won, only when the stop operation sequence is "left center right", the stop operation timing is determined. Regardless of this, if you win one of the "lower bells 1 to 3" and 7 medals are paid out, and if the stop operation sequence is "right and left middle" when the "right and left middle bell C" is won. As long as it is possible, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "lower bells 1 to 3" is won and seven medals are paid out. Further, the "one question", "one correct answer to the pressed position" and "one correct answer to the first stop" may be configured in the same manner as described above.

  Further, for example, it is supposed that “7” medals will be paid out when the correct pushing order is correct and “1” medals will be paid out when the correct pushing order is correct. It is only necessary to pay out the number of medals equal to or less than the specified number (15), and the number can be set appropriately. Further, when the pressing order is incorrect, the number of medals that is one or more and less than the number of inserted medals (three) may be paid out, and the number of medals can be set appropriately. Furthermore, when the pushing order is incorrect, the number of medals less than the number of medals paid out when the pushing order is correctly answered may be paid out.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 51 executes the following processing to realize the reel stop control described above.

  First, when the internal winning combination is determined in the internal lottery processing (see S14 of FIG. 42) described later and the information on the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 53, the main CPU 51 will perform the reel stop initial setting processing (FIG. In S16 of 42), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 52 is read out and stored in the main RAM 53 based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, exemplifying information stored as various stop control information, in relation to the above-mentioned second element, at which symbol position on each reel the stop button is operated and which symbol position is stopped ( Information that directly or indirectly regulates the number of sliding pieces), or in relation to the above-mentioned third element, in which stop operation sequence the stop button is operated, which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed. Examples of such information include information that directly or indirectly defines the information.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 53 in a reel stop control process (see S22 of FIG. 42) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is the “push order combination”, appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation sequence, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control is performed by generating (changing) stop control information.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation sequence, different stop controls may be executed even with the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and the same. The same stop control is executed as long as it is an internal winning combination and has the same stop operation timing and the same stop operation sequence.

[Structure of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configuration of various storage areas assigned to the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is composed of 27 storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 27. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to each symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14, and as a result of the internal lottery process, a winning is achieved. "1" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the allowed combination of symbols, and "0" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the not allowed winning combination.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 22 is composed of 27 storage areas of display combination storing areas 1 to 27. The display combination storing area is configured in the same manner as the above-mentioned internal winning combination storing area, and as a result of the internal lottery processing, among the combinations of the winning-approved symbols, the symbols that can be displayed on the activated line are displayed. Data (bit) corresponding to the combination is set to "1", and data (bit) corresponding to the combination of the symbols that cannot be displayed is set to "0".
Further, in the display combination storing area, each time the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the data (bit) is updated based on the data (bit) stored in the symbol code storing area described later. , A combination of symbols in which "1" is set even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped is a winning combination. That is, the display combination storing area is used for the main CPU 51 to identify the winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 27 symbol code storage areas 1 to 27. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is valid among the combinations of the symbols defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14. "1" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the symbol combination that can be displayed on the line, and "0" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the symbol combination that cannot be displayed. Set. Further, in the symbol code storage area, each time the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the data (bit) thereof is updated.

<Carry-over combination storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data relating to the carryover combination. For example, when the BB carryover state is set (that is, when “BB” is determined as the internal winning combination), bit 0 of the carryover combination storing area is set to “1”, and “BB” is won and BB is won. When shifting to the game state, the corresponding bit is reset to "0".

<Game status flag storage area>
In the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25, data relating to the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state and the RT gaming state is stored. For example, when the BB gaming state is entered, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1" and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1".

  Also, when the RT gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1", and when the RT gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state flag storage area becomes Bit 2 is reset to "0".

  In the following description, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is also called "BB game state flag", bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is also called "RB game state flag", and bit of the game state flag storage area 2 is also referred to as "RT1 game state flag".

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the states of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the stop button 17L is operated.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and "1" is stored in bit 1 when the stop button 17C is operated. Bit 2 corresponds to stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is operated, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Also, bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the effective stop buttons refer to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 51.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”, “1” is stored in bit 0, and other bits are set to “0”. Will be reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order “left → right → middle”, bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order “middle → left → right”, and bit 3 has the pressing order “middle → right → left”. The bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order “right → left → middle”, and the bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order “right → middle → left”.

<Direction game status storage area>
The effect game status storage area shown in FIG. 28 is an area for storing the effect game status managed by the main control side (that is, the main CPU 51). Bit 0 corresponds to the production game state "main CZ state 1", and when the production game state is "main CZ state 1", "1" is stored in bit 0.

  Similarly, the bit 1 corresponds to the production game state "main CZ state 2", the bit 2 corresponds to the production game state "pseudo-probability variation state 1", and the bit 3 the production game state "pseudo-probability variation state 2". Corresponding to, the bit 4 corresponds to the production game state "AT state". If all the bits are “0”, the effect game state corresponds to the “normal game state”. The details of each effect game state will be described later.

[Structure of various lottery tables used for production, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 37, configurations of various lottery tables used for effects and the like will be described.

<Reel action lottery table for main CZ state>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM 52. This reel action lottery table for the main CZ state is referred to in the lottery process during the normal game, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 48, and when the production game state is the “main CZ state 1” or the “main CZ state 2”, It is used to determine a reel action which is an effect according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state, whether the production game state is “main CZ state 1” or “main CZ state 2” (type of main CZ state) and main CZ state One of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined based on the value of the CZ game number counter indicating the number of stay games and the internal winning combination determined. The lottery value is assigned as follows.

  For example, when the production game state is “main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, the reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. Reel action 3 with a probability of 8192/65536, reel action 4 with a probability of 23808/65536, reel action 5 with a probability of 256/65536, reel action 6 with a probability of 256/65536. Is determined, and the reel action 8 is determined with a probability of 256/65536.

  Further, for example, when the production game state is “main CZ state 1”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “8”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, there is a probability of 64512/65536 in reel action 2 Is determined, the reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 512/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 512/65536.

  Further, for example, when the production game state is “main CZ state 2”, the value of the CZ game number counter is “1 to 7” or “8”, and the internal winning combination is “replay”, 52428/65536. The reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 6, the reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 6554/65536.

  Further, for example, the reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation one step and then starts forward rotation (normal rotation), and the reel action 2 starts forward after each reel reverses two steps. It is a symbol variation mode for starting rotation (normal rotation), and the reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode for starting forward rotation (normal rotation) after each reel is reversely rotated in three stages, and the reel action 4 is for each It is a symbol variation mode in which the reel starts reverse rotation in four stages and then starts forward rotation (normal rotation). The reel actions 5 and 7 start forward rotation (normal rotation) after each reel reversely rotates in five stages. It is a symbol variation mode, and the reel actions 6 and 8 can be a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts reverse rotation in six stages and then starts forward rotation (normal rotation). The reel actions 5 and 6 are different from each other in that a symbol variation mode is performed in the unit game, whereas the reel actions 7 and 8 are different in that a symbol variation mode is performed in the next unit game. Has become.

  Further, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 51, when the reel game 3 or 4 is executed when the production game state is the "main CZ state 1", the production game state from the next unit game is "main CZ state". 74. Further, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 74, when the production game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2", reel actions 5 to 8 are executed. Then, the AT game is started from the next unit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the main CZ state, one reel action among a plurality of reel actions having different stages of reverse rotation is determined and executed. It is possible to gradually improve the player's expectation at the time of execution, and since the degree of advantage is synchronized with the number of the stage of the reverse rotation, the advantage of the player is improved. It is possible to intuitively grasp the degree.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the value of the CZ game number counter is larger than that in the case where the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" and the value of the CZ game number counter is "1 to 7". The probability that the AT game is started (the probability that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 will be determined) is relatively higher when is "8". That is, since the number of continuous games in the CZ state is 8 (see FIG. 51), in the main CZ state, the final game is configured to be most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability that the AT game is started when the production game state is "main CZ state 2" is higher than when the production game state is "main CZ state 1" (reel The probability that any one of actions 5 to 8 will be determined) is relatively high. That is, in the main CZ state, the player is more advantageous in the case where the effect game state is the "main CZ state 2" than in the case where the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1". Has been done.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed in the main CZ state, the effect game state is shifted from the "main CZ state 1" to the "main CZ state 2", and the "main In the "CZ state 2", the probability that the AT game will be started (the probability that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 will be determined) is relatively high, so the modes of the reel action are diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game and prevent the expectation in the main CZ state from being lowered even when the reel action (reel actions 5 to 8) at which the AT game is started is not determined. You can

  29 to 37, the internal winning combination "Replay" refers to "normal lip 1 to 4" and "bell lip 1 to 4", and the internal winning combination "bell" is "center left-right cross-up bell 1". ~ 3 "," Middle right left cross-up bells 1-3 "," Right left middle middle bells 1-3 "," Right middle left middle bells 1-3 "," Middle left / right lower bells 1-3 "," Middle right left lower ranks " Bell 1-3 "," Right left middle lower bells 1-3 "and" Right middle left lower bells 1-3 ", and the internal winning combination" chance part "is" chance rep 1 "," chance rep 2 "and "Strong Chance Lip" refers to the internal winning combination "Watermelon" refers to "Watermelon", internal winning combination "Weak Cherry" refers to "Weak Cherry", and the internal winning role "Strong Cherry" refers to "Strong Cherry" 1 "and" strong cherry 2 ", but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, for example, the reel action lottery may be performed for all or some of the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. 17 and 18.

<Pseudo game number lottery table>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing the pseudo game number lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo-probability variation state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47. Used to determine

  As shown in (a) of FIG. 30, the pseudo game number random determination table is based on whether the production game state is “pseudo-probability variation state 1” or “pseudo-probability variation state 2” (type of pseudo-probability variation state). The lottery value is assigned so that any one of the pseudo game numbers 0 to 10 is determined.

  For example, when the production game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 1", the pseudo game number 0 is determined with a probability of 164/256, the pseudo game number 1 is determined with a probability of 40/256, and 40/256 of The probability that the number of pseudo games is 2 is determined, the probability that the pseudo game is 5 is determined by the probability of 6/256, and the number of the pseudo games is 10 by the probability of 6/256.

  In addition, for example, when the production game state is “pseudo-probability variation state 2”, the pseudo game number is 0 times with a probability of 32/256, and the pseudo game number is 2 times with a probability of 64/256. With a probability of 256, the pseudo game number is determined 3 times, with a probability of 64/256, the pseudo game number 4 times is determined, with a probability of 16/256, the pseudo game number 5 is determined, and with a probability of 16/256. 10 games are decided.

  When the pseudo game number is determined to be one or more, a pseudo internal winning combination is determined and the AT number is added (added) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination, as described later in the description of FIG. 74. Will be done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability that the number of pseudo games is given when the production game state is "pseudo-probability variation state 2" rather than when the production game state is "pseudo-probability variation state 1" Is relatively high. That is, in the pseudo-probability variation state, the player is more advantageous when the production game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" than when the production game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 1". Has been done.

<Pseudo internal winning lottery table>
FIG. 30B is a view showing the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo internal winning combination lottery table is referred to in the pseudo probability changing state lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 47 and in the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. 49, and the effect game state is “pseudo probability changed state 1 Or “pseudo probability variation state 2” and the pseudo game number is 1 or more, it is used to determine the pseudo internal winning combination.

  As shown in (b) of FIG. 30, in the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table, a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 128/256, and a strong cherry as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 64/256. The lottery value is assigned so that the watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256, and the chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256.

  In addition, the pseudo internal winning combination, each reel 3L, in a pseudo game based on the player's operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (pseudo stop operation) in the pseudo game executed during the game start lock. It is used to stop 3C and 3R. For example, when a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol "cherry" is pseudo stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C and the upper stage of the right reel 3R. However, when a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol "cherry" is pseudo stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Then, when a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the symbol of "watermelon" is pseudo stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. , When a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a "replay" symbol is suspected in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C. Is stopped, the symbol "cherry" is controlled to stop pseudo the middle of the right reel 3R. From this, it can be said that the pseudo internal winning combination is a reel action.

<High-precision transfer lottery table>
FIG. 30C is a diagram showing the high-probability transfer lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high-probability transition lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-probability variation state lottery processing described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state is "pseudo-probability variation state 1", is the transition to "pseudo-probability variation state 2"? Used to decide whether or not.

  As shown in (c) of FIG. 30, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, the high-probability transition lottery table maintains the current state with a probability of 255/256 (that is, do not transition to “pseudo-probability variation state 2”). ) Is determined, with a probability of 1/256, a high probability transition (that is, a transition to “pseudo-probability variation state 2”) is determined, and when the internal winning combination is “watermelon”, a probability of 256/256. The lottery value is assigned so that a highly accurate transition (that is, a transition to the “pseudo-probability variation state 2”) is determined (that is, 100% probability).

<Random lottery table for high security obstacle games>
FIG. 30 (d) is a diagram showing the high security obstacle game number random determination table stored in the main ROM 52. This high securing obstacle game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo-probability-changed state, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state shifts to the "pseudo-probability-changed state 2", Used to determine the number of unit games that can be simulated (that is, the number of times lock is executed during "pseudo-probability variation state 2" in the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. 49) To be

  As shown in (d) of FIG. 30, in the high securement obstacle game number random determination table, the high securement obstacle game number 3 times is determined with a probability of 164/256, and the high securement obstacle game number 4 times is determined with a probability of 60/256. The lottery value is assigned such that the number of highly secure obstacle games is 5 with a probability of 24/256, and the number of highly secure obstacle games is 10 with a probability of 8/256.

<Lottery table for end of pseudo-probability variation>
FIG. 30E is a diagram showing the pseudo-probability variation state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This pseudo probability changing state end lottery table is referred to in a pseudo probability changing state process described later in the description of FIG. 71, and when the production game state is “pseudo probability changing state 1”, it is managed by the sub CPU 81 “pseudo”. When the value of the pseudo-probability-change state management counter, which is the guaranteed game number of the probability-variation state 1 ", is" 0 ", it is used to determine whether to end the pseudo-probability change state.

  As shown in (e) of FIG. 30, when the internal winning combination is “replay”, the pseudo-probability-variation-end lottery table ends with probability of probability 8192/32768 (that is, ends “pseudo-probability-change state 1”). ) Is determined, with probability 24576/32768, it is determined that the probability variation continuation (that is, the “pseudo-probability variation state 1” is not ended) is determined, and if the internal winning combination is “bell”, the probability of 24576/32768. In order to determine the probability change end (that is, to end the "pseudo-probability change state 1"), and to determine the probability change continuation (that is, not to end the "pseudo-probability change state 1") with a probability of 8192/32768. Value is assigned.

  As will be described later in the description of FIG. 52, the “pseudo probability variation state 1” is actually ended based on winning the “Bell lip”, but in the present embodiment, it is determined by the sub CPU 81. When the above-described probability change end is determined, when either "normal lip 1 to 4" or "bell lip 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which "bell lip" is the winning combination ( (See FIG. 19), the "Bell Lip" is won and the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo-probable-change state management counter is not "0", or if the sub-CPU 81 determines that the above-described probable-variation continuation is determined, either "normal lip 1 to 4" or "bell lip 1 to 4" is an internal winning combination. When it is determined that “Berlip” does not win the winning combination, the “Belllip” is not won, and the “pseudo probability variation state 1” is continued. There is.

  Of course, the end and continuation of the “pseudo-probability-changed state 1” may be managed by the main CPU 51 as in the “pseudo-probability-changed state 2”. Specifically, the main CPU 51 manages the pseudo probability variation state management counter, and based on the value of the pseudo probability variation state management counter becoming "0", the effect game state is changed from "pseudo probability variation state 1" to "AT in progress". It is sufficient to shift to the “state”.

<Reel action lottery table for fixed winning combination>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a confirmed combination reel action lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This reel combination lottery table for fixed winning combination is referred to in the lottery process during the normal game, which will be described later in the description of FIG. It is used to determine a special reel action which is an effect according to the symbol variation mode. Note that the "determined winning combination" means a winning combination in which the AT game is started, and in the present embodiment, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" and "strong bell" (see FIG. 17). ) Is shown.

  As illustrated in FIG. 31, in the reel action lottery table for fixed winning combinations, one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined based on which fixed winning combination the internal winning combination is. A lottery value is assigned.

  When the internal winning combination is “Cherry Lip”, the special reel action 1 is determined with a probability of 128/256, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 43/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 42/256. Is determined, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 43/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong cherry rip”, the special reel action 1 is not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 85/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 86/256. The special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 85/256.

  When the internal winning combination is “strong bell”, the special reel actions 1 and 3 are not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 128/256, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 128/256. It is determined.

  In addition, for example, the special reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are reversely rotated in this order, and the right reel 3R is not rotated backward but is rotated forward (normal rotation). The reel action 2 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. The special reel action 3 is the left reel 3L. , The middle reel 3C, the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and after that, all the reels are all reversely rotated once and then the normal rotation is started, and the special reel action 4 is the special reel action 4. It is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are reversely rotated in this order, and then all the reels are all reversely rotated twice and then the normal rotation is started. It can be a thing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and described later in the description of FIG. 74, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the addition fails, and the AT count (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is not added. When the special reel actions 2 to 4 are determined, the addition is successful and the number of ATs according to the type of the special reel action is added. Specifically, when the special reel action 2 is decided, "300" is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter, and when the special reel action 3 is decided, the AT management difference number counter. When "400" is added to the value of the counter and the special reel action 4 is determined, "500" is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter.

  In the present embodiment, the "cherry" symbol is displayed for the left reel 3L regardless of whether the internal winning combination is "cherry rep" or the internal winning combination is "strong cherry rep". When the stop button 17L is operated at the stop operation timing, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and the stop control for winning the "cherry lip A" is performed. On the other hand, the stop control of the right reel 3R is configured to be different depending on whether the internal winning combination is "cherry rip" or the internal winning combination is "strong cherry rep."

  Specifically, for example, when the "BAR" symbol is pressed on each reel and the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, Stop display of each reel at the position of the symbol position data "12" in the middle of the left reel 3L, the position of the symbol position data "10" in the middle of the middle reel 3C, and the position of the symbol position data "13" in the middle of the right reel 3R. When the internal winning combination is "Cherry Lip", the symbol position data is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L even if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing. Although it can be stopped and displayed at the position of "12", the middle position of the middle reel 3C at the position of the symbol position data "10", the middle position of the right reel 3R is stopped at the position of the symbol position data "13". And it is configured so that it can not be displayed.

  Here, when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry rip", as described above, the special reel actions 2 to 4 are always determined, so that the addition success is confirmed, while the internal winning combination is " In the case of "cherry rip", as described above, since the special reel action 1 may be determined, whether or not the addition is successful has a probability of 1/2, so the internal winning combination is " Whether it is "strong cherry lip" or "cherry lip" is an event of great interest to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "BAR" symbol is pressed on at least each reel, the internal winning combination is changed to "strong cherry" by changing the stop mode of the symbol stopped and displayed on each reel. It is configured such that whether it was a “rip” or a “cherry lip” can be recognized before the special reel action is executed. With this configuration, the player who wants to quickly recognize the type of the final winning combination recognizes the type before the special reel action is executed by pressing the "BAR" symbol on each reel. It will be possible. On the other hand, the player who wants to recognize whether or not the special reel action will be successful in addition can dare to carry out the game with a further expected feeling by not performing the above-mentioned pressing. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful according to the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform the notification according to the preference of the player regarding the notification of the addition.

<Mode suggestion production lottery table>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a mode suggestive effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82.
This mode suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game process described later in the description of FIG. 72, and for determining the mode suggestion effect for suggesting the decided mode in the first game after the end of the AT game. Used for.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the mode suggestion effect lottery table, the lottery value is set so that any one of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 9 is determined based on which mode the current mode is. It is assigned.

  When the current mode is “mode A”, the mode suggestive effect 1 is determined with a probability of 6552/32768, the mode suggestive effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestive effect 3 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. Is determined, the mode suggestive effect 4 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestive effect 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode B”, the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 7476/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion is performed with a probability of 6554/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestive effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestive effect 5 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768, the mode suggestive effect 6 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768, and 1024 / The mode suggestive effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, and the mode suggestive effect 8 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  When the current mode is “mode C”, the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 9728/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 8192/32768, and the mode suggestion is performed with a probability of 4096/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestive effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestive effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, the mode suggestive effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and 1024 / The mode suggestive effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the mode suggestive effect 8 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768, and the mode suggestive effect 9 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

  Here, the mode is used to determine the next ceiling game number, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 73. The mode A is the most disadvantageous mode for the player, and the probability that 1000 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that of the mode B. Further, the mode B is a more advantageous mode than the mode A, and the probability that 240 games will be selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that of the mode A. Further, the mode C is the most advantageous mode for the player, and the number of ceiling games is always selected to be 100 or less.

  That is, when the mode suggestive effects 6 to 8 are determined, it is determined that the current mode is the mode B or the mode C, and when the mode suggestive effect 9 is determined, the current mode is determined. Since it is decided that the mode is the mode C, the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  Further, since the mode suggesting effect is performed in the first game after the AT game is finished, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the game motivation due to the end of the AT game.

<Rottery table for suggesting the number of remaining games>
FIG. 33 is a view showing the remaining game number suggestive effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the during-normal-game processing described later in the description of FIG. 72, and the number of remaining games until the AT game is started (that is, the ceiling game) for every 10 games during the normal game. It is used to determine the remaining game number suggesting effect for suggesting the number of games up to the number.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the remaining game number suggesting effect lottery table, one of the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 10 indicates the remaining game number suggesting effect based on the range of the current remaining game number. A lottery value is assigned as determined.

  For example, when the current number of remaining games is “11 to 30” games, the remaining game number suggesting effect 1 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The number of remaining games suggesting effect 4 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the number of remaining games suggesting effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, and the number of remaining games suggesting effect 6 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The number of remaining games suggesting effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the number of remaining games suggesting effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and the number of remaining games suggesting effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, which is 9300/32768. The remaining game number suggestive effect 10 is determined with a probability.

  Further, for example, when the current number of remaining games is “31 to 50” games, the remaining game number suggesting effect 2 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggesting effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The number of remaining games suggesting effect 4 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, the number of remaining games suggesting effect 5 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, and the number of remaining games suggesting effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. The number of remaining games suggesting effect 7 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the number of remaining games suggesting effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and the number of remaining games suggesting effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768. With a probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggestive effect 10 is determined.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the remaining game number suggestive effect 1 is determined and executed, the remaining game number is "1 to 10" game or "11 to 30" game (that is, remaining 30 When it is determined that the number of remaining games is within the game), and the remaining game number suggestive effect 2 is determined and executed, the remaining number of games is “31 to 50”, “51 to 100”, or “101 to 240” ( In other words, when it is determined that the remaining 31 games or more and 240 games or less) and the remaining game number suggestive effect 3 is determined and executed, the remaining game numbers are "1 to 10" and "11 to 30". , "31-50", "51-100" or "101-240" (that is, within the remaining 240 games), it is determined that the remaining game number suggestive effects 1 to 3 are executed. Number of games remaining for players Less it (ie, the start of the next AT game to be close) can be directly recognized. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, when any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 8 to 10 is determined and executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the remaining number of games.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the probability that a specific remaining game number suggesting effect is executed in a certain remaining game number range is set to a certain remaining game number suggesting effect in another remaining game number range. While the number of remaining games is decreasing by making it higher or lower than the probability that the It is supposed to add a new playability to make the number of remaining games guessed.

  A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of estimating the number of remaining games by the remaining game number suggesting effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  For example, the remaining game number suggestive effect 4 is executed with a probability of 2000/32768 when the current remaining game number is in the range of “31 to 50” or “101 to 240”, and the current remaining game number is “ 241- "is executed with a probability of 300/32768, and when it is within the range of other remaining games, it is executed with a probability of 100/32768. When executed, it can be inferred that the number of remaining games is likely to be in the range of "31 to 50" or "101 to 240", but on the other hand, it may be in the range of "241 to". Can be guessed.

  In this case, when none of the remaining game number suggesting effects 4 to 7 is executed during the subsequent execution of the remaining game number suggesting effects, the remaining game number may still be in the range of "241 to". Can be guessed to be high. On the other hand, when any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 4 to 7 is executed, the range of the remaining game number is narrowed down according to the type of the executed remaining game number suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 34. It is possible to guess. When any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 3 is executed, it is possible to definitely confirm that the number of remaining games is small, as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to the AT game is performed by executing the remaining game number suggesting effect every time 10 games are played in the normal game. A new game property of guessing can be added. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the more the number of games in the normal game, the more the number of remaining games suggesting effect will be executed. Since it is possible to grasp, it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to the AT game, in some cases it can be estimated by executing one remaining game number suggestive effect, or in some cases, the remaining games are performed a plurality of times. In some cases, it can be estimated by the execution of the number suggestion effect, so that the interest of the remaining game number suggestion effect itself can be significantly improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the remaining game number suggestive effect is determined with the lottery probability as described above, it is monotonous in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to AT game. It is possible to prevent the above, and to make the game more diverse.

  The effect data relating to the remaining game number suggestive effects 4 to 7 is preferably at least effect data having some relationship with each other. For example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestive effect 4 is effect data displayed as "close?", And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestive effect 5 is displayed as "should be close ...". The production data relating to the remaining game number suggesting production 6 is the production data displayed as "It should be coming soon!", And the production data relating to the remaining game number suggesting production 7 is "Soon to be near". ! ”Can be displayed.

  Further, for example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggesting effect 4 is effect data displayed as "where is the character A?", And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggesting effect 5 is "place a or place. It should be in b! ”, and the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is the effect data displayed as“ Let's find a place a! ”and the remaining game number suggestion. The effect data relating to the effect 7 may be effect data displayed as “Let's find a place b!”.

<At point lottery table during AT>
FIG. 35 is a view showing the in-AT point addition lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This in-AT point addition lottery table is referred to in a start command reception time process which will be described later in the description of FIG. 69, and when any of "Bell Rep 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination during the AT game, It is used to determine whether or not points during AT are cumulatively added.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the during-AT point addition lottery table determines whether to maintain (non-win) or add (win) based on the current point value (that is, the current AT-point counter value). The lottery value is assigned so as to be performed.

  When the current point value is “0”, maintenance (non-win) is determined with a probability of 26214/32768, and addition (win) is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. Further, when the current point value is “1”, maintenance (non-win) is determined with a probability of 27646/32768, and addition (win) is determined with a probability of 5120/32768.

  Further, when the current point value is “2”, maintenance (non-win) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and addition (win) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. When the current point value is “3”, the maintenance (non-win) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and the addition (win) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768.

<At addition lottery table during addition state lottery table>
FIG. 36 is a view showing an AT number addition lottery table in the on-board state stored in the sub ROM 82. This addition state AT number addition lottery table is referred to in the addition state process described later in the description of FIG. 70, and when the value of the addition state point counter described later becomes "100" or more during the addition state. , Is used to determine an AT number addition value which is a value added to the AT management difference number counter.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the addition-time AT count addition lottery table, the AT-number addition value is determined based on the addition-state management counter value indicating the number of stay games in the addition state. The lottery value is assigned to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the AT number addition lottery from becoming monotonous in the additional state, and to keep the interest of the game even when the additional state is repeatedly controlled.

  For example, when the added-up state management counter value is “9” (excluding the introduction of the added-up state, the first added-up state game), there is a probability of 29492/32768 as the AT number addition value, and the difference number of 50 sheets (AT management difference It is determined that "50" is added to the number counter, and the difference of 100 sheets is added as the addition value of the AT number with the probability of 3276/32768 (adding "100" to the AT management difference number counter).

  Further, for example, when the added-on state management counter value is “5” (excluding the introduction of the added-on state, the fifth added-state game), there is a probability of 20276/32768 as the AT number addition value and the difference number of 20 sheets (AT management It is determined that "20" is added to the difference sheet counter for use, and the difference number of 30 sheets is added (addition of "30" to the difference sheet counter for AT management) as an AT count addition value with a probability of 8192/32768. , With a probability of 3276/32768, the difference number of 50 sheets is added as the AT number addition value (“50” is added to the AT management difference number counter), and with the probability of 1024/32768, the difference number 100 is added as the AT number addition value. The number of sheets (adding “100” to the AT management difference number counter) is determined.

  Further, for example, when the addition state management counter value is “0” (the 10th game in the addition state except when the addition state is introduced), there is a probability of 24166/32768 as the number of ATs difference 30 sheets (AT management It is determined that "30" is added to the difference sheet counter for use), and the difference number of 50 sheets is added as an addition value of the AT number with a probability of 6554/32768 (addition of "50" to the difference sheet counter for AT management). , With a probability of 2048/32768, the difference number of 100 sheets (adding “100” to the difference sheet counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value.

  In the present embodiment, difference number management is adopted as a method for managing the number of ATs. Here, difference number management is a medal inserted in a unit game from the number of paid-out coins (for example, 7 coins) when a medal is paid out by winning one of the small wins in the unit game. The value (for example, 7-3 = 4) obtained by subtracting the number of inserted sheets (for example, 3 sheets), which is the number of sheets, is subtracted from the difference sheet counter (for example, AT management difference sheet counter), and the difference is obtained. When the value of the number of sheets counter becomes 0 or less, the AT game is to be ended.

  However, in the present embodiment, the AT management method is not limited to the above-described difference number management, and for example, a game number management method for managing the number of games in which AT games are played, a push order Any one of a method of managing the number of times of notification, a method of managing the number of sets that manages a predetermined number of games as one set, a method of managing a continuation rate for continuing AT games, or a method thereof. Combinations can also be adopted. That is, in the case of "addition" of "AT count", in addition to adding the difference number to the difference number counter, the number of games in which AT games are played is added, and the number of push forward winning combinations is added, Either the number of sets is added and the continuation rate is reset, or the continuation rate is set high, or a combination thereof is included.

<Point addition lottery table during addition state>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a point addition lottery table in the on-addition state stored in the sub ROM 82. This add-on state point addition lottery table is referred to in the add-on state process, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 70, and determines the point addition value that is the value to be added to each game in the add-on state and the add-on point counter. Used for. It should be noted that the point counter during the addition state is cumulatively added with the point addition value during the addition state, and when the value of the point counter during the addition state is “100” or more, the above-mentioned AT number is added and the addition state is added again. Can be done (continue) from the beginning.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the point addition lottery table during the addition state is determined so that any one of the point addition values 1 to 100 is determined based on which internal winning combination is determined. Value is assigned.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is "replay", one of the point addition values 1 to 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and one of the point addition values 6 to 10 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768. , 819/32768, the point addition values 11 to 15 are determined, the probability is 163/32768, the point addition values 16 to 20 are determined, and the point addition value 21 to 21 is determined with the probability 81/32768. Any of 32 is determined, one of the point addition values 34 to 36 is determined with a probability of 8/32768, and one of the point addition values 72 to 76 is determined with a probability of 2/32768, of 1/32768 Any of the point addition values 78 to 100 is determined by the probability. Although the point addition values 37 to 72 are omitted, it is assumed that any lottery value including 0 is assigned.

  Further, as the addition state, a first addition state and a second addition state are further provided. In the first addition state, the point addition value is randomly determined using the point addition lottery table during the addition state shown in FIG. In the additional state, the point addition lottery table in the additional state having different lottery values may be used to perform the lottery of the point addition value. In this case, the point addition lottery table during the addition state used in the second addition state is assigned a lottery value such that the point addition value given to the point addition lottery table during the addition state shown in FIG. 37 is relatively higher. At the same time, in the in-addition-state point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37, the lottery value of “1” or more may be assigned to the point addition values 33 and 77 to which the lottery value “0” is assigned. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the type of the added state by determining the predetermined point addition value.

[Structure of various data used for reel effect control]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, a configuration of various data used for reel effect control will be described.

<Data for reel effect selection>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM 52. This reel effect selection data is data used to control the effect in the symbol variation mode according to the determined reel action in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the reel effect selection data is associated with the effect number and the excitation output selection data, or the effect phase end data, for each effect target reel.

  The number of times of performance is data defining the number of times of performing the excitation output control based on the associated effect excitation output table or the pattern position adjustment data. For example, when "32" is associated as the number of presentations and "reverse rotation excitation output table" is associated as the production excitation output table, the end code starts from the first address of the "reverse rotation excitation output table" (see FIG. 39). The excitation output control up to 1 is defined as once, and is executed 32 times.

  In addition, the excitation output selection data is data for selecting the type of the effect excitation output table or the type of the pattern position adjustment data. Actually, in the excitation output selection data, a data address indicating the location of the effect excitation output table or a data address indicating the location of the pattern position adjustment data is stored, and the effect excitation is generated based on the data address. Although the output table or the pattern position adjustment data is read, in FIG. 38, each table or data is directly stored for convenience.

The effect phase end data is data for identifying the end of the reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode) on the effect target reel. For example, when the reel effect selection data is "1" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), when the excitation main force control by the hold excitation output table is executed 10 times, the left reel 3L While the reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode) ends, the reel effect selection data is "2".
When the production target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), after executing the excitation output control by the acceleration rotation excitation output table once, further executing the excitation output control by the symbol position adjustment data 2 84 times. After that, the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) for the left reel 3L is controlled to end.

  In this way, by storing the number of times of presentation, the excitation output selection data, and the production phase end data individually for each of the production target reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), various reel productions (production by a pattern variation mode). ) Is possible.

<Direction excitation output table>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect excitation output table stored in the main ROM 52. Each of the effect excitation output tables is based on the excitation output selection data in the reel effect control process described later with reference to FIG. 59 or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. It is used to output excitation data to the stepping motor.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the production excitation output table is associated with the excitation direction data, the production excitation timer, or the end code.

  The excitation direction data is data that defines the rotation direction of the reel (that is, the output order of pulses to the excitation phase in each stepping motor). For example, when the excitation phase of the stepping motor is A to D phases (4 phases), the excitation direction data "forward rotation" is AB phase, BC phase, CD phase, DA phase order. Is the data that is controlled so that the reel rotates in the forward direction (rotates from the top to the bottom from the viewpoint of the player) by outputting the excitation data. The excitation direction data "reverse rotation" is the A-D phase. , D-C phase, CB phase, B-A phase are output in this order to control the reel to rotate in reverse (from the player's point of view, rotate from bottom to top). The excitation direction data “hold” is data and is controlled so as to hold the reel stopped state by exciting all of the A to D phases or not exciting all of the A to D phases. The data.

  The effect excitation timer defines the value of the timer that is decremented by 1 in the timer updating process (see S322 of FIG. 55) described later, and the end code is the excitation data of the excitation output table. This is data for identifying the end of output.

  That is, for example, when the "reverse rotation excitation output table" is set as the effect excitation output table, first, the excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction is output for the number of interrupts twice, and then, The excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction is output by the number of times of two interruptions, and the control is ended.

<Direction symbol position search data>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM 52. This effect symbol position search data is a symbol position at the time of starting or ending the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) in the reel effect adjustment output process which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. It is data used to search whether the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect symbol position search data, the number of searches and effect symbol position search data are associated with each effect target reel according to the type of reel action.

  The reel actions 1 to 8 are as described above, and the reel action 9 is a reel action executed when the production game state shifts to the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" in the "during AT state", and the reel action 10 Is a reel action executed when the production game state shifts to "pseudo-probability variation state 2" in "AT state". The reel action 11 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "weak cherry", the reel action 12 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "strong cherry", and the reel action 13 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "watermelon". However, the reel action 14 corresponds to a pseudo internal winning combination "chance combination".

  In addition, the reel action 9 is a reel action in which the "red 7" symbols are finally aligned in the middle row on each reel, and the reel action 10 is finally in which the "red 7" symbols are aligned upward in each reel. The reel action 11 is a reel action in which the "cherry" symbol is finally displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R, and the reel action 12 is Finally, each reel is a reel action in which the "cherry" symbols are arranged in the lower row, and the reel action 13 is a reel action in which the "watermelon" symbols are finally aligned in the lower right of each reel. In the action 14, the "replay" symbol is finally displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "Cherry" symbols and has a reel action that is displayed in the middle.

  The number of searches is data that defines the number of times to search the effect symbol position in the reel effect adjustment output processing described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. In other words, it is appropriate as the effect symbol position on the effect target reel. It is data showing the number of different symbol positions. For example, when the reel action is "9" and the production target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L has one symbol position for displaying the "red 7" symbol in the middle row (the symbol). Since the position data is only 2), the number of searches is "1", whereas when the reel action is "12" and the production target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L Since there are two symbol positions (symbol position data 13 and 18) for displaying the "cherry" symbol in the lower row, the number of searches is "2".

  In other words, the effect symbol position search data, when the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle of the data for reel effect selection, as the symbol position when starting the excitation output control in the subsequent reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode) If the production symbol position is used to search whether it is an appropriate symbol position and the symbol position adjustment data is at the end of the reel production selection data (more accurately, before the production phase end data) Is used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position as the symbol position when ending the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect by the symbol variation mode).

[Pachislot machine game flow]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, as a state in which the player is playing a game, the AT game is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and a normal game that is relatively disadvantageous to the AT game. It is roughly divided into the normal game which is a state.

<Regular game>
As for the transition from the normal game to the AT game, the number of games after the AT game has reached the above ceiling game number (ceiling game number exhaustion), winning the above-mentioned fixed winning combination (determined winning combination), as described above. The reel actions 5 to 8 are determined in the main CZ state (CZ success) as a trigger.

  Here, in the case of shifting from the normal game to the AT game by the fixed winning, first, the basic number of continuation of the AT game is given based on the winning of the fixed winning (150 is added to the AT management difference number counter). ) Will be done. After that, the reel action (special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined according to the type of the fixed winning combination as described above, and the number of continuous additions of the AT game according to the determined reel action is given (AT management difference number). 300, 400 or 500 is added to the counter).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning combination of the final winning combination is not limited to simply generating the AT game, and the reel action to be executed in the next game is determined based on the winning of the final winning combination. When the determined reel action is a specific reel action (special reel actions 2 to 4), the AT game continuation number is added based on the execution of the specific reel action. It is possible to improve the expectation not only in the game in which the winning combination is won or in the prize, but also in the next game.

  In the present embodiment, the basic continuation number is given based on the winning of the definite winning combination, and the additional continuation number is given in accordance with the determined reel action. However, the mode of giving is not limited to this. For example, when the special reel action 1 is decided, the first continuation number is given as the basic continuation number (150 is added to the AT management difference number counter), and when the special reel action 2 is decided, the basic continuation number is set. As the basic number of continuations (AT management difference sheet counter) when a special reel action 3 is determined. When the special reel action 4 is determined, the fourth continuation number may be given as the basic continuation number (500 is added to the AT management difference number counter). In this case, at the time of executing or ending the special reel action, if the basic number of times of continuation given by the notifying means is to be notified, not only the game in which the winning combination is won or the prize is won, but also in the next game. Expectations can be improved. Further, in this case, the right to continue the AT game again after the AT game is finished (that is, the right to further continue the AT game for one set) may be given as the additional continuation number. Furthermore, the number of rights to continue this AT game may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the reel action based on the winning of the winning combination may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the basic continuation number described above becomes the basic extra number, and the additional continuation number described above becomes the additional extra number, and may be given to the player.

(Main CZ state)
In addition, in the normal game, when "strong chance rep" is determined as an internal winning combination and one of "special rep A1-6" or "special rep B" is won (strong chance rep is established), by the control of the main CPU 51. The production game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and becomes the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the production game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" to be transferred thereafter, a specific reel action (one of the reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed. The CZ is successful, and the normal game is to be transferred to the AT game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance zone state (main CZ state), which is a state where it is easy to shift to the AT game, is derived by the control of the main CPU 51, and in this main CZ state, a plurality of reel actions ( A specific reel action (one of reel actions 5 to 8) among the reel actions 1 to 8) is determined, and when it is executed, the game is shifted to the AT game, so that only the lock is executed. Compared with the case, the sense of expectation in the chance zone state can be significantly improved.

  The transition to the main CZ state may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, based on the fact that a specific reel action (one of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined from among the plurality of reel actions (reel actions 1 to 8) and is executed, a predetermined AT number of times is reached. Should be given to Further, the number of ATs to be given may be changed according to the type of a specific reel action (any one of the reel actions 5 to 8).

<AT game>
When shifting to the AT game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less (the AT number is exhausted), and the stop is performed according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the medals.

  In addition, in the AT game, if any of the "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the addition lottery for the AT points is won, the AT points are cumulatively added. Then, when four points during this AT are added (the value of the during-AT point counter becomes 4), even if the number of ATs is exhausted, the AT game will be continued again.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the AT game, there are provided two types of states in which the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter) can be added, that is, the addition state and the pseudo probability variation state. .

(Additional state)
In the AT game, "BAR REP 1" or "BAR REP 2" is determined as an internal winning combination, and if any winning replay is won by performing the first stop operation other than the left reel 3L, the sub CPU 81 The control shifts to the addition state. This addition state continues for 12 games per set, and is used when the addition state is introduced in the first game (value of addition state management counter is 11) and the second game (value of addition state management counter is 10). The additional lottery is executed, and in the 3rd to 12th games (the value of the additional state management counter is 9 to 0), the lottery of the points in the additional state is executed. Then, when the value of the point counter during the addition state becomes "100" or more, the value is added according to which game in the addition state the value of the point counter during the addition state becomes "100" or more. The number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is determined, and the addition state can be performed again from the beginning (setting continues).

  In addition, in the addition state, the value of the AT management difference number counter is not subtracted even if a small winning combination is won, and the player is informed of the procedure of the stop operation which is the most advantageous for the pushing small winning combination. Therefore, if the added state itself continues, the number of ATs will be increased and the number of medals will increase.

  In addition, in the add-on state, the predetermined number that is the value of the add-on state point counter for continuing the add-on state is set to "100", and the additional state points exceeding the predetermined number "100" are added. When acquired, the surplus will be carried over to the next addition state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific start condition is satisfied during the AT game (for example, "BAR REP 1" or "BAR REP 2" is determined as an internal winning combination, except for the left reel 3L). By performing the first stop operation, if one of the winning replays is won and the additional state is consumed by two games, a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games are exhausted or the additional state is added). Is continuously determined), the above-mentioned additional state is controlled.
This addition state also functions as a state in which the number of ATs is increased, and also in a state in which medals are increased. Therefore, even if the number of ATs cannot be increased, the player is given a medal. By surely enjoying the benefit of increase, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Also, when the addition state continues, the points in the addition state that are cumulatively added during the addition state can be carried over, so there is no waste in the lottery result of the points in the addition state The expectation of lottery can be further improved.

  The transition to the additional state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, it is sufficient to shift to the AT game based on the fact that the value of the point counter during the addition state becomes "100" or more. In addition, the number of ATs initially given may be changed according to which game in the addition state the value of the addition state point counter becomes “100” or more.

(Pseudo probability state)
Further, in the AT game, when any of the "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination and the winning of the pseudo random change state transition lottery is won, a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed and the main CPU 51 The control shifts to the pseudo probability change state. In this pseudo probability variation state, the number of pseudo games when the game start lock is executed once is determined, and the pseudo games of the determined number can be played. It should be noted that, in determining the number of simulated games, the number of simulated games can be determined a plurality of times.

  Here, the pseudo game is an operation on the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) that is locked at the start of the game (pseudo insertion operation), an operation on the start lever (start lever 16) (pseudo start operation), The progress is controlled by determining the pseudo internal winning combination and operating the stop button (stop button 17L, 17C, 17R) (pseudo stop operation), and the game is as if it were a normal game. It is possible to impress the player as if he were progressing. In the present embodiment, the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is made based on the pseudo start operation, like the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed based on a pseudo closing operation or a pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). In addition, the pseudo insertion operation, the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo stop operation are collectively referred to as “pseudo game operation”. In addition, for convenience of explanation, operation to the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) in the normal game (normal insertion operation), operation to the start lever (start lever 16) in the normal game (normal start operation), normal The operation (normal stop operation) to the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) in the game is collectively referred to as "normal game operation".

  Then, in the pseudo-probability variation state, the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is added to the lottery based on the determined internal winning combination, and the number of ATs (based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination is determined). (Additional lottery) will be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the pseudo-probability variation state, not only the opportunity to increase the number of ATs based on the internal winning combination, but also the opportunity to increase the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination are given. Therefore, it is possible to expect a lottery of additional lottery during one unit game, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game regarding the additional ride. Further, normally, in the pachi-slot machine, an upper limit value is set for the number of medals to be paid out in one unit game (for example, 15 coins), and further, a prescribed time required for one unit game. Where it is set (for example, 4.1 seconds from the start operation of the previous game to the start operation of the current game), by using the pseudo game, it does not conflict with these settings, for example, shorter than the specified time Since the lottery can be generated a plurality of times in time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state, which is advantageous to the player in the pseudo-probability variation state.

  Further, in the pseudo-probability-changed state, a pseudo-probability-changed state 1 (first mode) and a pseudo-play count that is relatively larger than that of the "pseudo-probability-changed state 1" (first mode) are determined. There is a "probability variation state 2" (second mode), and based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition (e.g., winning of a highly precise transition lottery), "pseudo-probability variation state 1" (first mode) to The state changes to the pseudo-probability variation state 2 "(second mode). In this "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (second mode), when the pseudo game is executed, the number of times of pseudo games is always determined twice or more (see (a) of FIG. 30). , It is possible to enjoy a plurality of opportunities for additional lottery based on the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery state that is advantageous to the player and is in the pseudo-probability variation state.

  Also, the transition from the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (second mode) to the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times the pseudo game is actually performed (the number of highly secure obstacle games). Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the opportunity of the lottery in which the number of ATs is increased based on the pseudo game in the “pseudo probability changing state 2” (second mode).

  In the present embodiment, one of the “Bell Lips 1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition random determination in the pseudo-probability variation state is won, and the specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed. Then, the transition to the pseudo-probability variation state is made, but the transition timing to the pseudo-probability variation state is not limited to this. For example, it is assumed that the sub CPU 81 conducts a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the pseudo-probability variation state, and when this lottery is won, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of the normal rep 1 to 4) is controlled by the sub CPU 81. At the time of winning, a predetermined stop operation order (for example, a stop operation order in which “Berlip” will be won) is notified, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to “Belllip”) is displayed. On the basis of the number of times reaching a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the main CPU 51 may shift the effect game state to the “pseudo-probability-changed state 1” to shift to the pseudo-probability-changed state.

  Further, in this case, as the predetermined stop operation sequence, a first predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, “right left middle” in the case of “normal lip 1” and “middle left / right” in the case of “normal lip 3”) , A second predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, “right center left” in “normal lip 1”, “middle right left” in “normal lip 3”), and the sub CPU 81 It is determined in advance which of the first predetermined stop operation sequence or the second predetermined stop operation sequence is to be notified, and the predetermined stop operation sequence is notified based on the fact that the stop operation is performed in the second predetermined stop operation sequence. If the number of times the symbol combination is displayed is a specific number (for example, two times) or more, the main CPU 51 shifts the production game state to the “pseudo-probability variation state 2”, and if the number is less than the specific number, the main CPU 51 , And to shift the production game state to "pseudo probability variation state 1" It may be. Alternatively, while a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined specific order (for example, a second predetermined stop operation sequence → a first predetermined stop operation sequence → a second predetermined stop). In the order of the operation sequence), the effect game state is set to "pseudo-probability variation state 1" based on whether or not the game stopped and operated by the first predetermined stop operation sequence or the second predetermined stop operation sequence is performed. , Or “pseudo-probability variation state 2”. Further, in these cases, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery for each unit game. Furthermore, when determining whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery for each unit game, a specific internal winning combination (for example, watermelon) At the time of winning, the state in which the second predetermined stop operation sequence is difficult to be notified may be promoted to the state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is easily notified.

  Further, the transition to the pseudo probability changing state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, an AT game based on the determined internal winning combination, or a lottery for shifting to the main CZ state is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the AT game or a main CZ state is determined based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Should be performed.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 62.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main control processing. The main control process described below is started when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 51 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 43 (S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal, the setting is changed properly, etc., and the initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization processing, for example, a storage area designated in advance so as to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization processing, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 53 are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 44 (S12). In this medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts the random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S13). Here, the random number value is a value used for the internal lottery process (hereinafter, random number value 1) and a value used for the lock lottery process (hereinafter, random number value 2), and in the present embodiment. , 0-65535.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 45 (S14). The main CPU 51 that executes this internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determination means.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46 (S15). In this lock lottery process, lottery for determining whether or not to perform the above-mentioned "lock", a lottery for effect game state transition, etc.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel stop initialization processing (S16). By this reel stop initialization process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 53 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S17). The start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the internal winning combination type, the game state flag type, the effect game state type, the lock type and its period, the bonus end number counter value, and the like. is there.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes wait processing (S18). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the last unit game). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. The waiting time to wait is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait process, that is, the wait time, is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 (S19). In this lock execution processing, the lock at the start of the game, the reel action during the lock execution, etc. are executed based on the lottery result in the lock lottery processing in S15.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel rotation start processing for rotating all reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). Along with this reel rotation start processing, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in FIG. 58). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

  By this interrupt processing, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating. After that, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interrupt processing, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until reaching a constant speed.

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the driving of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interrupt processing so that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed. Maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the above-mentioned reel index is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is, for example, data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have started to rotate.

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub control circuit 42 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel stop control processing (S22). By this reel stop control processing, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. Although not shown, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated reel stop command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of the reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces, or the planned stop position (that is, the reel actually stops). The symbol position) is data that the sub CPU 81 can recognize.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a prize search process (S23). In this prize search processing, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the symbol combinations displayed on the activated line are collated with the symbol combination table to identify the symbol combinations displayed on the activated line. It

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation, , And stores the data corresponding to the matching symbol combination (display combination) in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 22) and acquires the payout number (payout number counter value) associated with the symbol combination.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a medal payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the payout number counter value acquired as a result of the prize search process (S24). In this medal payout process, the hopper drive circuit 65 is controlled and the credit number is updated based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the state management process shown in FIG. 51 (S25). In this state management process, transition control of the production game state is executed based on the type of reel action executed, the type of winning combination, etc., and the output of the external signal from the external centralized terminal board described above is turned on or off. Is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes the game end lock execution process shown in FIG. 54 (S26). In the game end lock execution processing, the lock at the end of the game is executed based on a predetermined execution condition.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S27). . The winning operation command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of display combination, the payout number counter value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus end check process (S28). By this bonus end check process, a process of ending the operation of the BB when the BB end condition is satisfied is executed.

  In the bonus end check process, specifically, the present payout number counter value is subtracted from the bonus end number counter value stored in the bonus operation check process, which will be described later, and it is determined whether the value is a negative value. Then, when it is determined that the value becomes a negative value, the BB end processing is executed. In the BB end process, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned off, and the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the bonus end check processing, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus end command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus end command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, that the BB has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a bonus operation check process (S29). By this bonus operation check process, a process of operating the BB or the like is executed based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. After executing the processing of step S29, the main CPU 51 returns to the processing of step S11.

In the bonus operation check process, specifically, first, it is determined whether the display combination is BB. If it is determined that the display combination is BB, the BB operation process is executed.
In the BB operation process, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned on, and "75" is set as the value of the bonus end number counter. Further, the carry-over combination storing area is cleared (the value of bit 0 is reset to "0"). Next, when it is determined that the display combination is not BB, it is determined whether the display combination is replay. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is replay, an automatic insertion request is made. That is, it is controlled so that the inserted number (3) in the current unit game is automatically inserted in the next unit game. If it is determined that the display combination is not replay, the process ends.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the bonus operation check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus start command data is stored in the main RAM 53. Stored in the allocated communication data storage area. The bonus start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the BB has started, for example.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S30).
In this determination processing, it is determined whether the backup is normal by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores the set value and the like of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like in the main RAM 53 as backup data when the power is turned off, and the determination processing when the power is turned on (S30). At, the setting value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 53 are read.

  Then, the main CPU 51 compares the checksum calculated from the read set value or the like with the backed-up checksum, and if the comparison results match, determines that the backup is normal.

  When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the backed up setting values and the like in the main RAM 53 (S31). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 53.

  After executing the process of step S31 or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 51 causes the main CPU 51 to change the setting (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachi-slot machine 1. ) Is on (S32). Here, when determining that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 51 executes initialization processing when changing the setting (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the symbol code storing area, and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 53 are cleared and the set values are cleared. The data stored in the carryover combination storing area may not be cleared or may be cleared.

  In addition, in the initialization processing at the time of changing the setting, the data stored in the effect game state storage area is cleared, and the high securement obstacle game number counter and the CZ game number counter are also cleared. Then, the "normal game state" is set as the effect game state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S34). . The initialization command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, whether or not the setting value has been changed and the setting value.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes setting value change processing (S35). In this set value changing process, the set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachi-slot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 16 is operated is confirmed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the on state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the on state is obtained.

  Here, when the main CPU 51 obtains a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (that is, when the setting change switch is turned from ON to OFF) (NO), the main control circuit 41 causes the sub control to be performed. The initialization command data to be transmitted to the circuit 42 is generated, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S37), and the power-on process is terminated.

  When determining in step S32 that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the backup is normal (S38). If it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 51 displays an error display or the like that the backup is not normal. Note that the main CPU 51 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown) when the backup is in an abnormal state (backup error). Therefore, the error state is released only when the setting is newly changed.

  When it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 restores the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before power-off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 53. (S40), the power-on process is terminated.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check processing executed in step S12 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not a replay was won in the previous unit game.

  When determining in step S50 that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 51 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 51 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, whether or not a medal has been inserted, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  In step S50, when determining that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 51 permits acceptance of medals (S53). For example, the main CPU 51 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 35 to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 can pass through the selector 35.

  In addition, in step S50, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), it is in a state in which reception of medals is prohibited from the previous unit game, and therefore processing relating to reception of medals. Is not executed, the acceptance of medals may be permitted even when the player has won the replay in the previous unit game.

  After the processing of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the inserted number in the main RAM 53 according to the game state (S54). In this embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the inserted number in any gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). Here, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the medals have been properly inserted, or whether the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B has been operated. A medal insertion check process for checking is executed (S56). In this medal insertion check process, when the medals are properly inserted, or when the medals are inserted by the operation from the credit to the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B, according to the number of inserted medals, The value of the inserted number counter or the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53. A transmission process is executed (S57).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether it is possible to insert medals or credit (S58). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the inserted number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 is executed. It is determined that the medal can be inserted or credited when the condition is satisfied, and the medal can be inserted or credited when the condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined in step S58 that medals cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 51 prohibits medal acceptance (S59). For example, the main CPU 51 forms a path so that the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 are discharged from the medal payout opening 24 without driving the solenoid of the selector 35.

  When it is determined in step S55 that the acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), when it is determined in step S58 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the process of step S59 is executed. The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number at which the game can be started. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value (S60).

  If it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when determining that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch 16S is ON (S61).

  Here, when determining that the start switch 16S is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when determining that the start switch 6S is ON (YES), the main CPU 51 prohibits the reception of medals (S62), and ends the medal reception / start check processing.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery processing executed in step S14 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state in the main RAM 53 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 sets the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 15 or 16 in the main RAM 53, depending on the game state.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number storage area (S71). The random number value acquired here is a random number value 1. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each lot number of the corresponding setting value, and draws the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72).
That is, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the subtraction result of the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when determining that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S75), and when it is determined that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO). , And returns to the process of step S72.

  On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is set so that the subtraction result does not always become 0 or more when the main CPU 51 finishes checking all the winning numbers, so the BB gaming state Step S76 is not executed except in the case of (RB game state).

  In step S73, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), it refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 53 to determine the small win / replay data pointer from the winning number. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

  After executing the processing of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 17), and based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination. Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the internal winning combination for small winning combination / replay is determined, and 27 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the data pointer for small winning combination / replay acquired in the process of step S76 or S77. The data value of is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination data acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, the 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storing areas 1-27.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storing area is 0 (YES), it refers to the internal bonus winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18), and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. The winning combination is acquired (S81).

  In the processing of this step S81, the 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the processing of step S76 or S77 is determined by referring to the bonus internal winning combination determination table. It

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, when "BB" is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, the bit 0 corresponding to "BB" in the carryover storage area is set to "1".

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the bit 0 corresponding to "BB" in the carryover combination storing area is set to "1" in step S82.

  When determining in step S83 that the value of the internal carryover combination storing area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is "BB" (S84). Here, when determining that the internal winning combination is "BB" (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets "1" to the RT1 game state flag. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the bonus combination is only “BB”, so the determination process may not be executed.

  When it is determined that the value of the internal carryover combination storing area is not 0 in step S80 (NO), and when the value of the internal carryover combination storing area is 0 in step S83 (YES), the internal winning combination is "BB" in step S84. If not (NO) or after executing the process of step S85, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area (S86). .

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the lock lottery processing executed in step S15 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S90). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RT1 game status flag is set to "1". When determining that the gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (YES), then it determines whether the production gaming state is the "AT in progress" (S91). When determining that the effect game state is not the “AT in progress” (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal game lottery process (S102) described later in the description of FIG. 48, and ends the lock lottery process.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S91 that the effect game state is the “AT in progress” (YES), whether or not it is the pseudo probability change state, that is, the effect game state is the “pseudo probability change”. It is determined whether or not the state is "1" or the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (S92). When it is determined that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" or the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (YES), the pseudo-probability variation state lottery process (S93) described later in the description of FIG. 47 is executed, The lock lottery process ends.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S92 that the effect game state is not the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" or the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (NO), the internal winning combination is one of the bell lip 1 to 4 subsequently. It is determined whether or not (S94). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (YES), it executes the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery based on the random number value 2 (S95).

  In this pseudo-probability-changed state lottery, for example, a lottery is executed so that the probability of 512/65536 is used to win the transition to the pseudo-probability-change state, and the probability of 65024/65536 is not won to the transition to the pseudo-probability-change state. .

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery is a winning (S96). When it is determined that the result of the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery is not winning (non-winning) (NO), the lock lottery process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the result of the pseudo-probability-changed state random determination is a win (YES), the reel action 9 or 10 is randomly determined based on the random number value 3 (S97). In the process of step S97, for example, the reel action 9 is determined with a probability of 192/256, and the reel action 10 is determined with a probability of 64/256.

  Here, unlike the random number value 1 and the random number value 2, the random number value 3 is a random number value that is separately generated and acquired each time it is necessary in various processes in the main control process. The random number value 3 may be a random number value generated by the above-described random number generator 56 and stored in the random number value storage area, similarly to the random number value 1 and the random number value 2. A latch circuit (not shown) may be used to acquire when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, when various switches such as the start switch 16S are turned on or off).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets "pseudo-probability change state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 2" as the effect game state according to the reel action type (S98). For example, if the reel action determined is the reel action 9, "pseudo probability variation state 1" is set as the effect game state, and if the reel action determined is the reel action 10, "pseudo probability variation state" is the effect game state. 2 ”is set.

  Next, if the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" is set as the effect game state, the main CPU 51 sets the number of highly secured obstacle games to 5 in the number of highly secured obstacle games (S99), and ends the lock lottery process. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S94 that the internal winning combination is not one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (NO), it subsequently determines whether the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip. (S100). When determining that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the lottery of the push-up order for additional lock based on the random number value 2, and stores the lottery result (S101). The lock lottery process ends. The main CPU 51 also ends the lock lottery process when it determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO).

<Lottery processing during pseudo probability change>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the pseudo random change random determination process executed in step S93 of the lock random determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability changing state 2" (S200). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (YES), the process proceeds to step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (NO), it refers to the high-probability transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 30 and based on the random number value 3. , Transition state is determined (S201).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high-accuracy transition has been made, that is, whether or not the high-accuracy transition has been determined as the transition state (S202). When the main CPU 51 determines that the high-accuracy transition has not been determined as the transition state (the current state has been determined) (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S206.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high-accuracy transition has been determined as the transition state (YES), it refers to the high securement disorder game number random determination table shown in (d) of FIG. 30 and based on the random number value 3. , The number of games with high securing obstacles is determined (S203).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the high securement obstacle game number determined in step S203 in the high securement obstacle game number counter (S204), and also sets the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" as the effect game state (S205). .

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo game number random determination table shown in (a) of FIG. 30, and refers to the random number value 3 and the type of the pseudo probability variation state, that is, the effect game state is the “pseudo probability variation state 1”. , The pseudo game number is determined based on whether it is the “pseudo probability changing state 2” (S206), and the pseudo game number determined in step S206 is set in the pseudo game number counter (S207).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S208). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), it refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. 30 and based on the random number value 3, the pseudo internal winning combination. Is determined (S209), and the lottery process during the pseudo-probability variation state ends. The main CPU 51 also ends the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state when it determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES).

<Lottery processing during normal game>
48 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing during normal game executed in step S102 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 46.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the final winning combination (S220). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether the internal winning combination is cherry rip, strong cherry rip, or strong bell. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is the final winning combination (YES), it refers to the final winning combination reel action random determination table and is executed in the next game based on the random number value 3. The type of special reel action (one of special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined (S221), and the lottery processing during the normal game is finished.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not the definite winning combination (NO), subsequently, whether or not it is in the main CZ state, that is, the effect game state is "main CZ state 1", or " It is determined whether or not it is the "main CZ state 2" (S222). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (NO), the normal game lottery process is ended.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S222 that the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), the reel action 7 or 8 is subsequently set. It is determined whether or not there is (S223). When determining that the reel action 7 or 8 is set (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery process during normal game.

  When determining in step S223 that the reel action 7 or 8 has not been set (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state shown in FIG. Based on the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2", CZ game number counter value (what game in the main CZ state), and random number value 2 One of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 51 increments the CZ game number counter by 1 (S225), and ends the lottery process during normal game.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the production game state is the “normal game state” and the internal winning combination is the push order small combination (the small combination / replay data pointer is , "17" to "40"), when the stop button 17L is not operated by the first stop operation, the lottery process during normal game is performed for a predetermined game (for example, 10 games). It may be configured so as not to be protected (that is, a “penalty” is given). As a result, it is possible to prevent a profit not intended by the developer of the pachi-slot machine and the game hall from being given to the player.

<Game execution lock execution process>
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the game start time lock execution processing executed in step S19 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S110). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the special reel actions 1 to 4 has been determined in the lottery process during the normal game described above in the previous game. When it is determined that the special reel action is determined (YES), the effect timer according to the type of the special reel action is set (S111), and the process proceeds to step S114. In the process of step S111, for example, when the special reel action 1 is decided, "3581" (about 4 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when the special reel action 4 is decided, By setting "13427" (about 15 seconds) as the effect timer, the control is performed so that the lock is executed while the special reel action is executed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), subsequently, it determines whether the reel action has been determined (S112). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined in the lottery process during the normal game described above in the previous game or the current game. When it is determined that the reel action is determined (YES), the effect timer according to the type of reel action is set (S113). In the process of step S113, for example, when reel action 1 is determined, "1791" (about 2 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when reel action 6 or 8 is determined, "8951" (about 10 seconds) is set as a production timer.

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S114), and plays the game. The start-time lock execution processing ends. Here, the lock command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the value of the effect timer, the type of the special reel action, the type of the reel action, the type of the pseudo internal winning combination, and the like.

  When determining in step S112 that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S115). When determining that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock execution process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the pseudo game effect timer is set (S116). Here, the value of the effect timer that is predetermined as necessary for each pseudo game (for example, "26853" (about 30 seconds)) is set in the pseudo game effect timer.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S117). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has already been determined in S209 in the above-described pseudo probability changing state lottery process. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the process proceeds to step S119.
When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), it refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. 30 and based on the random number value 3, The pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S118).

  Next, the main CPU 51 generates the above-described lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 53 (S119). , A pseudo game process (S120) described later in the description of FIG. 50 is executed, and the pseudo game number counter is decremented by 1 (S121).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game number counter is 0 (S122). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S116.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game number counter is 0 (YES), it executes the random delay process (S123) and ends the game start time lock execution process.

(Random delay processing)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo game process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, is completed, the reels 3L and 3C are executed by the reel rotation start process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. Although the original rotation of 3R will be started, for example, after the execution of the game start lock after the "watermelon" symbol alignment is pseudo-stopped, from the state where the "watermelon" symbol is aligned, the reel 3L, The original rotation of 3C and 3R will be started, and there is a possibility that the adjustment will be detrimental to the fairness of the game. Because there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp the timing of the stop operation by performing the effect with the reel (for example, a pseudo game), and if no measures are taken, the effect with the reel is the intention. Without doing so, it would end up having an auxiliary function of pressing.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the end of execution of the game start lock, a predetermined symbol is displayed (in the above-described example, the state of "watermelon" symbols is aligned). In this case, a predetermined random number value (for example, random number value 3) is obtained for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a timer is set based on the obtained random number value, and the number of interrupts of the set timer, The start of reel rotation is delayed at random.

  With this configuration, even when performing a reel effect (for example, a pseudo game), there is no fear that it will be an adjustment that damages the fairness of the game, and the game is started (the original rotation of the reel is started. It can be done.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 executes the reel position detection circuit 63 to detect the reel index of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (S129). That is, the main CPU 51 starts rotation (hereinafter, pseudo rotation) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R for the purpose of performing a pseudo game by the reel effect control processing described later in the description of FIG. 59, and the pseudo thereof. It is possible to detect the symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R that is rotating.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) has been performed on the reel that can be pseudo stopped (S130). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R which are pseudo-rotating are operated.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has been performed on the reel that can be pseudo stopped (YES), the reel is pseudo stopped at the pseudo stop position corresponding to the determined pseudo internal winning combination (S131). For example, when a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the "watermelon" symbol is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Pseudo stop.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo stopped state holding data according to the type of the reel that has been pseudo stopped (S132). Thus, for example, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled so that the reverse rotation direction and the forward rotation direction are alternately performed at different timings. Therefore, from the perspective of the player, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R that are in the pseudo stop are as if they are vibrating in the vertical direction. Therefore, the reels are stopped by the pseudo stop control and the normal stop control is performed. It is possible to prevent the stop of each reel from being confused.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reel that can be pseudo stopped (S133). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is still in pseudo rotation. If it is determined that there is a pseudo stop reel (YES), the process returns to step S130, and if it is determined that there is no pseudo stop reel (NO), the process proceeds to step S136.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the stop operation has not been performed on the reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), then it determines whether the effect timer is 0 (S134). . When it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S130, and when it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the determined pseudo internal winning combination is determined. Is set (S135), and the process proceeds to step S138.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo game is performed and the player does not operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the pseudo internal winning combination is determined. Since the reel action is set and the reels are automatically stopped at the pseudo stop position according to the determined pseudo internal winning combination, even for the player who did not perform the pseudo stop operation It is possible to surely enjoy the reel effect by the pseudo game.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S133 that there is no pseudo-stoppable reel (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the bet button has been operated (S136). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B has been operated. When the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has been operated (YES), the process proceeds to step S138.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bet button has not been operated (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S137). When determining that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S136.

  When determining in step S137 that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the start lever has been operated (pseudo start operation) (S138). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated. When it is determined that the start lever is not operated (NO), the process of step S138 is repeatedly executed. As a result, even if one pseudo game is automatically advanced, the start of the next pseudo game will be executed based on the pseudo start operation of the player. The reel effect can be surely enjoyed, and the benefit of the addition decision based on the pseudo internal winning combination can be surely enjoyed.

  When determining in step S138 that the start lever has been operated (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S139). When it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the pseudo game process is ended. When it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the effect timer is updated to 0 (S140), and the pseudo game process is ended.

  Even when it is determined in step S138 that the start lever is not operated (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether the effect timer is 0, and the effect timer is 0. If it is determined, the pseudo game process may be ended. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the dummy game from hindering the smooth progress of the normal game.

  If the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the stop operation has been performed on the reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), in step S136 that the bet button has been operated (YES), in step S138. , If it is determined that the start lever has been operated (YES), and in one or more cases, or in all cases, a predetermined value is added to the production timer or the initial value is reset to the production timer. It may be done. With this configuration, the player performing each of the above-described operations in the pseudo game can surely enjoy the reel effect by the pseudo game by preventing the effect timer from becoming 0. It is possible to prevent the reel effect by the pseudo game from being redundant more than necessary.

<State management process>
51 is a flowchart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “AT in progress” (S150). When determining that the effect game state is the “AT in progress” (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the AT in progress state management processing (S151) described later in the description of FIG. 52, and proceeds to the processing of step S160. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the “AT in progress” (NO), subsequently, whether or not it is the main CZ state, that is, the effect game state is the “main CZ state 1”. , Or "main CZ state 2" is determined (S152). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), the process proceeds to step S155.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect game state is not the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (NO), it subsequently wins a strong chance lip at the first left stop. It is determined whether or not, that is, "strong chance rep" (small win / replay data pointer value "11") is determined as an internal winning combination, and the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time. It is determined whether or not one of the "A1 to 6" or the "special lip B" is won (S153). When it is determined that the player has won the strong chance lip at the first stop on the left (YES), "main CZ state 1" is set as the effect game state (S154), and the process proceeds to step S160. Also, if it is determined that the player has not won the strong chance rip at the first stop on the left (NO), the process proceeds to step S160.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), subsequently, the reel action 3 or 4 is executed. It is determined whether or not (S155). When it is determined that the reel action 3 or 4 has been executed (YES), "main CZ state 2" is set as the effect game state (S156), and the state management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action 3 or 4 has not been executed (NO), subsequently, it determines whether any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (S157). When determining that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the effect game state, "main CZ state 1", or "main CZ state 2" that has been set. (S159), the state management process ends.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S157 that one of the reel actions 5 to 8 has not been executed (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 8 (S158). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is 8 (YES), it executes the process of S159 described above and ends the state management process. The main CPU 51 also ends the state management process when it determines that the CZ game number counter is not 8 (NO).

<AT status management process>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the AT state management process executed in step S151 of the state management process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability changing state 2" (S230). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game is executed (S231). Specifically, in step S206 of the lottery process during the pseudo-probability variation state shown in FIG. 47, one or more times is determined as the number of pseudo games, and in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, the pseudo game. It is determined whether the process has been executed. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game is not being executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S236.

  When determining in step S231 that the dummy game has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 decrements the high security obstacle game number counter by 1 (S232). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high security obstacle game number counter is 0 (S233). When the main CPU 51 determines that the high securement obstacle game number counter is 0 (YES), it sets “pseudo-probability variation state 1” as the effect game state (S234), and proceeds to the process of step S236. That is, the main CPU 51 ends the production game state "pseudo-probability variation state 2" based on the fact that the high securing obstacle game number counter has become zero. In addition, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high securing obstacle game number counter is not 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S236.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines in step S230 that the effect game state is not the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (NO), then it determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 1". A judgment is made (S235). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" (NO), the process proceeds to step S238.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S235 that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 1" (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not a prize has been won in the bell lip (S236). When it is determined that the bell lip has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S238. If it is determined that the player has won the bell lip (YES), the pseudo probability variation state is cleared (S237). That is, the winning of the bell lip is a condition for ending the production game states "pseudo-probability variation state 1" and "pseudo-probability variation state 2".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not one of the bells has won (S238). Specifically, the "middle left and right bells" and "middle right and left bells" that are "push order small wins" as internal winning combinations
If either "Right Middle Left Bell" or "Right Middle Left Bell" is decided as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols relating to any small winning combination in which seven medals are to be paid out (see FIG. 14). ) Determines whether or not a prize has been won. When determining that one of the bells is won (YES), the main CPU 51 increments the AT game winning number counter by 1 (S239), and ends the AT state management process. The main CPU 51 also ends the AT state management process when it is determined that any of the bells has not been won (NO).

  In addition, in step S238, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not any of the bells has been won and not whether or not the bell has been won. Specifically, as the internal winning combination, any one of the "pushing order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", is determined as the internal winning combination. It is also possible to execute the processing of step S239 when it is determined whether or not any of the bells has been won. That is, the AT game winning number counter may be a counter that is updated with a winning of the “push order small winning combination”. With such a configuration, for example, in the AT game, between the player who performed the stop operation by ignoring the notified stop operation order, and the player who performed the stop operation by observing the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profits to be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S160 of the state management process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying on the external display or the like the number of times the AT game is continued, that is, how long the AT game is continuing, and the external signal 2 is It functions as a signal for displaying the number of initial hits of the AT game, that is, the transition from the normal game to the AT game on an external display or the like.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether only the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, only the external signal 2 is output (S250). When it is determined that only the external signal 2 is ON (YES), the external signal 1 is set to ON, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is started (S251), the AT game winning number counter, the AT end check counter An initial value (for example, 0) is set to (S252), and the external signal output management process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that only the external signal 2 is not turned on (NO), then both the external signals 1 and 2 are turned on, that is, whether both the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output. It is determined whether or not (S253).

  When determining that both the external signals 1 and 2 are on (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (S254). Here, for example, “38” is specified as the predetermined value. When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT game winning number counter is a predetermined value (YES), the external signal 1 is turned off, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is terminated (S255), and the external signal output management process is performed. To finish.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S254 that the AT game winning number counter is not the predetermined value (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the middle / right first stop is performed at the time of winning the push order bell ( S256). Specifically, as the internal winning combination, any one of the "pushing order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", is determined as the internal winning combination. In the case of, the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is determined whether or not the first stop operation is performed.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop has been performed at the time of winning the push order bell (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the AT end check counter is 1 or more (S257). ). When determining that the AT end check counter is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process. If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 1 or more (YES), it sets an initial value (for example, 0) to the AT end check counter (S258), and executes the external signal output management process. finish.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop has not been performed during the push order bell win (NO), it subsequently determines whether the left first stop has been performed during the push order bell win. Yes (S259). Specifically, as the internal winning combination, any one of the "pushing order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", is determined as the internal winning combination. When the left reel 3L is operated, it is determined whether the first stop operation of the left reel 3L is performed. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not performed when the push order bell is won (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S259 that the left first stop has been performed at the time of winning the push order bell (YES), it increments the AT end check counter by 1 (S260), and then the AT end check counter is 2. It is determined whether there is any (S261). When determining that the AT end check counter is not 2 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S261 that the AT end check counter is 2 (YES), it turns off the external signals 1 and 2, that is, ends the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 (S262). ), The set production game state and the “AT in progress” state are cleared (S263), and the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S253 that the external signals 1 and 2 are not both turned on (NO), subsequently, it is determined whether or not one of the bells is won at the middle / right first stop. A judgment is made (S264). Specifically, as the internal winning combination, any one of the "pushing order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", is determined as the internal winning combination. In the case, the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is subjected to the first stop operation, and 7 medals will be paid out, whether or not a combination of symbols relating to any small winning combination (see FIG. 14) is won. To judge. When the main CPU 51 determines that one of the bells has been won at the middle / right first stop (YES), it increments the normal game winning number counter by 1 (S265).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the normal game winning number counter is 3 (S266). When the main CPU 51 determines that the normal game winning number counter is not 3 (NO), the external signal output management process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the normal game winning number counter is 3 (YES), the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, the output of the external signal 2 is started (S267), and the production game state is set. The “AT in progress” state is set (S268), and the external signal output management process ends.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S264 that the player has not won any of the bells in the middle / right first stop (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the left first stop is performed at the time of winning the push order bell. Is determined (S269). Specifically, as the internal winning combination, any one of the "pushing order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell", is determined as the internal winning combination. When the left reel 3L is operated, it is determined whether the first stop operation of the left reel 3L is performed. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not performed when the push order bell is won (NO), the external signal output management process ends. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop has been performed when the push order bell has been won (YES), it sets an initial value (for example, 0) to the normal game winning number counter (S270), and outputs an external signal. The management process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the start condition for shifting to the AT game is satisfied, and after shifting from the normal game to the AT game, the value of the normal game winning number counter becomes 3 (that is, “push”). Based on "Small winning combination", the answer was correct for 3 consecutive pushes when winning), the production game state was changed to "AT in progress", and the output of external signal 2 was started. Based on the fact that only 2 is output, the output of the external signal 1 is started, and when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38. The output of the external signal 1 is terminated based on the fact that the winning number of the "pushing order small winning combination" is 38 in the "AT in progress" state. Here, if the AT game continues, the output of the external signal 1 will be started again in the next game. In addition, when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2 (that is, the incorrect push order is obtained in succession when the "push order small winning combination" is won). Based on this, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is configured to be terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the AT game state, which is an advantageous game state advantageous for the player, is output from the external centralized terminal board of the pachi-slot machine 1 by at least two types of external signals, so that an external display etc. Since it is possible to notify by the above, it is possible to properly display the number of initial hits of the AT game, which is of great interest to the player, and the number of times the AT game is continued by an external display or the like. In addition, since the output timing of the external signal 1 and the output timing of the external signal 2 can be made different with a simple configuration, the control load on the external display side can be reduced and a communication error or the like may occur. Can also be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the output of the external signal 2 is that the value of the normal game winning number counter is 3 (that is, the push order correct answer is three consecutive times when the "push order small winning combination" is won. It has been configured that the establishment of the AT game comes later than the start condition (start of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 is that the value of the AT game winning number counter is 38 (that is, in the "AT in progress", the "push order small win"). The number of times of winning is 38 times), and the establishment of the AT game ends later than the end condition (the AT game ends under the control of the sub CPU 81). Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, when "150" is set as the initial value of the AT management difference number counter, the addition of the AT game winning number counter is started. Since the prize has been won three times in the "push order small winning combination", the value of the AT management difference sheet counter at that time is "150-4 sheets × 3 times = 138". After that, in the “AT in progress” state, when the number of winnings of the “push order small winning combination” becomes 35 times, the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes “138-4 sheets × 35 times = −2”. The condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 comes later than the ending condition for ending the AT game.

  Then, when the AT game ends, when the value of the AT end check counter reaches 2, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 ends, and when the AT game continues, the value of the AT end check counter Before the number becomes 2, the value of the AT game winning number counter becomes 38, and once the output of the external signal 1 is finished, the output of the external signal 1 is restarted to indicate the number of continuous ATs. Information can be displayed on an external display. Since the initial value “150” of the AT management difference number counter can be replaced with the AT number “38 times”, if the AT number “38 times” is regarded as one set, the external signal 1 is output. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to display information indicating how many sets of one AT game are played on the external display.

  With such a configuration, the start and end of the AT game can be notified to the player earlier than the display by the external display or the like, for example, by the notification by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like, so that the game is played. The convenience of the player who is playing can be improved. In addition, since the subtracted value of the AT management difference number counter due to the winning of the “push order small winning combination” and the number of winnings are almost the same, the number of continuous AT games (one set) is It can be properly displayed with a simple configuration.

<Lock execution processing at the end of the game>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the game end lock execution processing executed in step S26 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (S170). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the game end time lock execution processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), subsequently, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop operation is performed in the additional lock pushing order (S171). Here, the additional lock pushing order is the stop operation order stored in S101 of the lock lottery processing shown in FIG. 46, and specifically, the left first stop (that is, the stop operation order “left middle right”). , Or “left / right middle”), which is determined by lottery among four stop operation sequences (that is, stop operation order “middle left / right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle” or “right middle left”) It is one stop operation sequence. When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has not been performed in the push-up lock order for addition (NO), the game end-time lock execution processing ends.

  When the main CPU determines in step S171 that the stop operation has been performed in the push-up lock addition order (YES), it sets the lock data after all stops (S173), and sets "3581" (about 4 seconds for the effect timer). ) Is set (S174), the above-mentioned lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub-control circuit 42 is generated, and the generated lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S175). ), The game end time lock execution process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, when the stop operation is performed at the first left stop and the prize is won, the production game state If is the "normal game state", the production game state is shifted to the "main CZ state 1", but no benefit is given when the production game state is the "AT state".

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the AT game is started by the control of the sub CPU 81, the effect game state is shifted to the "AT in progress state" by the control of the main CPU 51, so it is during the AT game. , If the production game state is not "AT in progress" (this state may be referred to as "AT preparation state"), in this case, the production game state is "main CZ state 1" It is not reasonable to move to.

  On the other hand, although the winning probability of the strong chance lip does not change depending on each effect game state, or whether it is the normal game or the AT game (see FIG. 15), it is completely profitable depending on the winning time of the strong chance lip. It is also unreasonable that no is given.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the additional lock pressing order is determined by lottery, and the stop operation is performed according to the determined additional lock pressing order. In this case, a profit different from the profit of shifting the production game state to the "main CZ state 1" is given.

  Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, during the normal game, the sub CPU 81 controls to notify the player of the stop operation order for causing the player to make the first left stop, or Alternatively, when the penalty is given as described above, the player is made to perform the stop operation by the first left stop by not executing the notification of the stop operation order, and the production game state is set to "main CZ state 1". It is configured to give the benefit of shifting to ".

  On the other hand, during the AT game or in the AT preparing state, by the control of the sub CPU 81, first, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the push-up order for additional lock, and when the result of the lottery is a win, A notification of the stop operation sequence related to the determined push-up lock order is executed, and when the stop operation is performed according to this notification, the game end lock based on the lock data after all stops is executed, and the game end time Based on the fact that the lock is executed, the AT number addition (addition) lottery is executed, and the benefit of the AT number addition (addition) is given.

  With such a configuration, during the AT game or in the AT preparing state, the reel action (for example, reel actions 1 to 8) is prevented from shifting to the chance zone state (main CZ state), Preventing the contents of the game from becoming difficult to understand, and even if the game is not switched to the chance zone state (main CZ state), a specific internal winning combination (for example, a strong chance lip) has been determined The profit based on can be given to the player as a different profit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not the above-mentioned different profits are given can be controlled by the control of the sub CPU 81. Therefore, the profit of the player and the profit of the game hall can be divided by a simple configuration. Equity can be managed appropriately.

<Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51. This process is executed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 51 executes an input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 56 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 51 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 51 stores, in the main RAM 53, information about ON / OFF of various switches such as the start switch 16S and the stop switch 17S, and ON / OFF information of various sensors such as the medal sensor 35S.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes timer update processing (S322). Next, the main CPU 51 executes a communication data transmission process described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S323). Next, the main CPU 51 executes reel control processing described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S324).

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes a lamp / 7SEG drive process (S325). For example, the main CPU 51 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 51 restores the register (S326) and ends the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the input port check processing executed in step S321 of the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the state of the input port before the last interrupt, that is, one interrupt before in the main RAM 53 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 53 (S332).

  In this way, by comparing the state of the input port one interrupt before and the state of the current input port, the main CPU 51 can confirm the state of both input ports, and It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether or not the MAX bet button 15A, the 1BET button 15B, the start lever 16 and the like have been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 53 (S333). For example, when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S is data indicating OFF before one interrupt, but is data indicating ON at present, the main CPU 51 shifts to ON edge. Is stored in the main RAM 53, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S is data indicating ON before one interrupt, but is data indicating OFF at present. If so, the off-edge information indicating the transition to the off-edge is stored in the main RAM 53.

<Communication data transmission process>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the communication data transmission processing executed in step S323 of the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 decrements the communication data transmission timer by 1 (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  Here, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  Here, if it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 51 generates non-operation command data, and the generated non-operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 53 as communication data. The data is stored in the storage area (S343).

  The non-operation command data is set with parameters such as on-edge and off-edge information of various switches and on and off information of various sensors stored in the above-described input port check processing as parameters. As a result, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process in which a command is not transmitted from occurring and prevent a fraudulent act on a command transmission. Further, by making the sub CPU 81 recognize this information, it is possible to prevent an operation during a period during which the operation is originally invalid. The effect can be changed based on an operation (for example, an operation on the MAX bet button 15A while the reel is rotating).

  In step S342, when it is determined that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES) or after the process of step S343 is performed, the main CPU 51 sets the communication data transmission timer to an initial value (for example, 14). Yes (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data has been completed (S346).

  Here, when determining that the transmission of the communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when determining that the transmission of the communication data has been completed (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the communication data storage area to clear it (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

<Reel control processing>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed in step S324 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a reel action has been determined (S271). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the reel actions 1 to 14 (the reel actions 11 to 14 include a pseudo internal winning combination) or the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined. When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has been determined (YES), it executes reel effect control processing (S272) described later in the description of FIG. 59, and ends the reel control processing. Although not shown, the main CPU 51 also determines the reel action execution timing to determine whether or not to perform the process of step S272. For example, since the reel actions 7 and 8 execute the reel action in the next game of the determined game, the main CPU 51, when the reel actions 7 and 8 are determined, the game of the next game. The start time (when the game start time lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 is executed) is determined to be the execution time, and the process of step S272 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has not been determined (NO), it executes the normal reel control process (S273) and ends the reel control process.

  Here, in this normal reel control processing, the main CPU 51 drives and controls each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start processing (S20 of FIG. 42), thereby rotating each reel. A constant speed that maintains the predetermined speed by executing an acceleration process for accelerating and controlling the drive of each stepping motor based on the speed of each reel reaching a predetermined speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute). The process is executed, and the stop process for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by controlling the drive of each stepping motor based on the rotation stop request for each reel in the stop control process (S22 of FIG. 42).

<Reel production control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the reel effect control processing executed in step S272 of the reel control processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets reel effect selection data according to the type of reel action (S274). Here, the reel effect selection data is data configured as shown in FIG. 38 as an example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 executes effect target reel selection processing (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 51 selects the most suitable effect target reel for performing the reel effect, according to the set reel effect selection data. For example, when the reel effect selection data corresponds to reel effect in which the respective reels are sequentially rotated in the order of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, the left reel is selected in the effect target reel selection process. The production target reels are selected in the order of 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. In addition, the selection mode of the effect target reel is not limited to this. For example, the reels that are pseudo-rotating may be set in a predetermined order (for example, an order in which the reel on the left side is set) or may be set randomly. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data capable of identifying the order in which the effect target reels are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel effect selection data and the effect number corresponding to the effect target reel and the effect output selection data corresponding to the effect target reel (S276). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when the reel effect selection data is “1” and the effect target reel is the middle reel 3C, when the process of step S276 is first executed, the effect number is 1 The excitation output table for reverse acceleration rotation is set as the excitation output selection data. Further, in the process of step S276, in the effect target reel change control process of step S288, which will be described later, when the effect target reel is changed, the effect number of times and the excitation output selection data of the portion to be restarted are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (S277). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 or It is determined whether it is 2. When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is not the symbol position adjustment data (NO), the main CPU 51 proceeds to the process of step S279. On the other hand, when determining that the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (YES), the main CPU 51 executes reel effect adjustment output processing (S278) described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the effect excitation output table based on the excitation output selection data or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process (S279). The result of the reel effect adjustment output processing will be described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the set production excitation output table and sets the excitation direction data and the head data of the production excitation timer (S280). Here, the effect excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the excitation data based on the excitation direction data and subtracts 1 from the effect excitation timer (S281). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect excitation timer is 0 (S282). When determining that the effect excitation timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is 0 (YES), it refers to the effect excitation output table that has been set, and updates the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer (S283). ). Specifically, when it is determined that the effect excitation timer is 0 when the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer head data are set, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer are set from the beginning. Update to the second data (ie the next data). If the next data in the performance excitation output table is the end code, the data is updated to the end code.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the effect excitation output table is the end code (S284). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is not the end code (NO), the process returns to step S281. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is the end code (YES), subsequently, whether or not the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been executed for the number of effects. It is determined (S285). When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has not been executed for the number of effects (NO), the process returns to step S280.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S285 that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been performed for the number of times of presentation (YES), it refers to the reel production selection data that has been set, and the number of times of production and The excitation output selection data is updated (S286). Specifically, the performance number and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data (S287). When determining that the data in the reel effect selection data is not the effect phase end data (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the effect target reel change control processing (S288), and returns to the processing of step S276.
In the effect target reel change control process, the main CPU 51 performs another effect target reel (for example, the middle reel 3C, during the effect control of one effect target reel (for example, the left reel 3L) during the reel effect. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the effect control of the right reel 3R) should be started or restarted, and when it is determined that the effect control is started or restarted, the effect target reel is set as one effect target reel (for example, one effect target reel). , The left reel 3L) is changed to another effect target reel (for example, the middle reel 3C). With this configuration, for example, in the reel effect selection data, other effect target reels are interlocked with each other even when the number of effect numbers and the excitation output selection data defined for a particular effect target reel are large. Therefore, the intended reel effect can be smoothly executed. Whether or not the effect target reel should be changed may be determined according to the prescribed number of effects or / and the number of excitation output selection data, and a dedicated change control timer is set, The determination may be made based on the change control timer becoming 0 and the process of step S286 being completed. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data indicating that the effect target reel should be changed and data that allows the effect target reel to be changed to be identified.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (YES), subsequently, it determines whether the effect has ended on all reels (S289). ). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data for all effect target reels. When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has not ended on all reels (NO), the process returns to the process of step S275. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has been completed on all reels (YES), the reel effect control process is ended.

<Reel production adjustment output processing>
60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the reel effect adjustment output process executed in step S278 of the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (S290). When determining that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the effect symbol position updating process (S291) described later in the description of FIG. 62, and subsequently, the effect symbol. It is determined whether the position is 0 (S292). When determining that the effect symbol position is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 moves to the processing of step S294.

  When determining in step S292 that the effect symbol position is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel effect selection data that has been set, and updates the effect number and excitation output selection data ( S293). Specifically, the performance number and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reverse rotation excitation output table as the effect excitation output table (S294), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. Here, the reverse rotation excitation output table is a table configured as an example in FIG. 39.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S290 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 1 (NO), subsequently, whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3 is determined. A judgment is made (S295). When determining that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the effect symbol position updating process (S296) described later in the description of FIG. 62, and the effect excitation output table. As a result, the excitation output table 1 for constant speed rotation is set (S297), and the reel effect adjustment output processing is ended. Here, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 1 is a table configured as an example in FIG. 39.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S295 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), that is, the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 2, in the description of FIG. 62. A performance symbol position updating process (S298) described later is executed, and subsequently, it is determined whether or not the production symbol position is data of less than one rotation (S299). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position updated in the effect symbol position updating process of step S298 is a identifiable symbol position without detecting the reel index. That is, the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63 when each reel reaches the reference position (the position where the symbol position data is 0). The main CPU 51 uses the effect symbol position as the reference. It is determined whether or not it is a symbol position that passes the position.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not data of less than one rotation (NO), it sets the acceleration rotation excitation output table as the effect excitation output table (S300), and performs the reel effect adjustment output process. finish. Here, the acceleration rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (YES), then it determines whether or not it is in the effect symbol position search phase (S301). Although not shown in the example of the reel effect selection data shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of symbol position adjustment data are defined as excitation output selection data in one reel effect selection data. In this case, data indicating whether or not to collate with production symbol position search data, which will be described later, is further defined in which case, and based on the data, it is determined whether or not in the production symbol position search phase. Will be done.

When determining that it is not in the effect symbol position search phase (NO), the main CPU 51 sets the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 as the effect excitation output table (S308).
The reel effect adjustment output process ends. Here, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 2 is a table configured as an example in FIG. 39.

  When the main CPU 51 determines that it is in the effect symbol position search phase (YES), it sets the effect symbol position search data and the number of searches corresponding to the reel action type and the effect target reel (S302). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reel action 9 is determined and the production target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), 2 (symbol position data is 2 as production symbol position search data. Data indicating that position) is set, and 1 is set as the number of searches.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data match (S303). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data match (YES), it refers to the reel effect selection data that has been set, and updates the effect number and excitation output selection data ( S304). Specifically, the performance number and the excitation output selection data are updated to the next data. If the next data in the reel effect selection data is effect phase end data, the data is updated to effect phase end data. Next, the main CPU 51 executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position does not match the effect symbol position search data (NO), the number of searches is subtracted by 1 (S305), and subsequently, whether the number of searches is 0 or not. Is determined (S306). When determining that the number of searches is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect symbol position search data (S307), and returns to the process of step S303.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S306 that the number of searches is 0 (YES), it executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

<Production symbol position update processing>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol position updating process executed in step S291, step S296 and step S298 of the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position at the end of the previous game or at the end of the previous reel effect as the effect symbol position (S310). That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is at the beginning of the reel effect selection data, the stop position at the end of the previous game is set as the effect symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is the middle or end of the reel effect selection data. In the case of, the stop position at the end of the previous reel effect (that is, the end of the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data before the symbol position adjustment data) is set as the effect symbol position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the previous input state of the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) and the current input state of the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) (S311). Specifically, the on-edge or off-edge information related to the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) stored in the input port check processing shown in FIG. 56 is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off edge (S312). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the input data of the input port assigned to the reel position detection circuit 63 was data indicating ON last time, but data indicating OFF this time.

  When determining that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off edge (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the effect symbol position (S313) and ends the effect symbol position update process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is not the off edge (NO), 1 is added to the effect symbol position (S314), and the effect symbol position update process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode) is executed based on the reel effect selection data, and when the symbol position adjustment data is defined in the reel effect selection data. Is configured to update the effect symbol position, select the effect excitation output table according to the updated effect symbol position and the type of the symbol position adjustment data, and perform the excitation output control. For example, even when performing excitation output control by the same forward rotation, if a small amount of rotation is sufficient depending on the type of the updated design symbol position and symbol position adjustment data, the constant speed rotation excitation output When the table 1 or 2 is set and a large amount of rotation is required, the excitation / rotation excitation output table is set. That is, it is not necessary to always search for the symbol position to execute the reel effect, and it is not necessary to define the entire reel effect selection data. It is possible to perform a reel effect. Therefore, even if there is a deviation in the symbol position of the reel before the start of the reel effect or during the reel effect, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control load to achieve the intended reel effect. Will be enjoyed.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 75.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 81 when the power is turned on.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks the sub RAM 83 for errors and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 64 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, various lamp This is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S352).
In the sound control task, the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R is controlled by the sub CPU 81. Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 66 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task started in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp-related data initialization process (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes waiting for a timer interrupt (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 81 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  An example of a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Further, a task group (not shown) of power interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) of door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S363).
In this process, the task with the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of the task groups for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task having the priority next to the lamp control task is executed. Note that, in step S363, the processes of steps S372 and S373 of the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a lamp data analysis process (S364), a lamp effect execution process (S365), and returns to the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task started in step S352 of the power-on processing shown in FIG. 63.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound data analysis process (S372), a sound effect execution process (S373), and executes the process of step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 initializes the communication message queue (S380) and checks the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one is received (S382). Here, if it is determined that the command different from the previous command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 81 returns to the process of step S381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a regular command, creates game information from the received command, and creates it. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 67 (S384) and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
67 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 executes effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 68 (S390), lamp data determination processing (S391), and sound data determination processing (S392), and registers each determined data. Then, (S393), the command analysis process ends.

<Production content determination processing>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect contents determination process executed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 67.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S400).
Here, if it is determined that the initialization command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes initialization command reception processing (S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the effect state is restored or the effect state is initialized based on the presence / absence of a setting change.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal has been inserted.

  On the other hand, when determining that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S404). Here, if it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 69 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set. For example, during the AT game, if the internal winning combination is the push forward combination, the effect data for notifying the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S406). If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes reel rotation start command reception processing (S407), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the process at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, effect data for outputting the reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S408). If it is determined that the reel stop command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock command has been received (S410). Here, when it is determined that the lock command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a lock command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 74 (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the lock command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the lock command is set. For example, effect data for displaying an image corresponding to the reel action type is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU81 executes a winning operation command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 75 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the process for receiving the winning operation command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a payout sound according to the number of payouts corresponding to a winning combination is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a bonus start command reception time process (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the present embodiment, the AT game is configured to be relatively advantageous over the BB game state. Therefore, based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command, unique performance data is obtained. May be configured not to be set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a bonus end command reception process (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command receiving process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the AT game is relatively advantageous over the BB game state, based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command, unique effect data May be configured not to be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a no-operation command has been received (S418). If it is determined that the no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the non-operation command reception process, the effect data may be changed based on the information transmitted as the non-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the process at the time of receiving the start command is effect data requesting continuous hitting of the MAX bet button 15A, the MAX bet button 15A received as the no-operation command is in the on-edge state or the off-edge state. The effect data is changed based on the state information. On the other hand, when determining in S418 that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect contents determination process.

<Processing when a start command is received>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the start command reception process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT game is in progress (S430). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is not in progress (NO), it executes a normal game process (S443) described later with reference to FIG. 72, and ends the start command reception process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is being performed (YES), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “AT state” (S431). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the AT preparing state described above.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is not the "AT in progress" (AT in preparation) (NO), it sets the navigation data for AT in-transition transition according to the internal winning combination (S432). ), And proceeds to the processing of step S438. Here, the during-AT state transition navigation data is data for notifying a stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out when the “push order small combination” is determined as an internal winning combination. Further, it is data for notifying the stop operation sequence so that the stop operation is not performed at the first left stop when the strong chance lip is determined as the internal winning combination. Although illustration is omitted, as described above, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the additional lock pushing order, and if the lottery result is winning, the determined additional lock push order is determined. It may also be data for informing the stop operation sequence.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is the "AT in progress" (not the AT in preparation) (YES), then it determines whether or not it is in the addition state (S433). . If the sub CPU 81 determines that it is in the add-on state (YES), it executes the add-on state process (S434) described later in the description of FIG. 70, and proceeds to the process of step S437.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S433 that it is not in the addition state (NO), it determines whether or not the effect game state is the pseudo probability variation state (“pseudo probability variation state 1” or “pseudo probability variation state 2”). A judgment is made (S435). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is not the pseudo-probable variation state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S437, and if it is determined that the effect game state is the pseudo-probable variation state (YES), FIG. In step S436, a pseudo probability variation state process, which will be described later, is executed.

  Next, if the navigation data is not set, the sub CPU 81 sets navigation data during AT game corresponding to the internal winning combination (S437). Here, the navigation data during AT game is basically the same as the navigation data for state transition during AT, but further, BAR lip 1, BAR lip 2, or fake BAR lip is determined as an internal winning combination. In some cases, the data can also be data for informing the reverse pressing stop operation order (that is, the stop operation order in which the stop operation is performed by the right first stop).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (S438). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the start command is ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is one of the bell lip 1 to 4 (YES), it refers to the in-AT point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 35 and based on the current point value. Then, the point addition lottery is executed (S439).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the above-mentioned AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (S440). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the lottery during AT point addition lottery is not addition (winning) (maintaining (non-winning)) (NO), the start command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the AT addition point lottery is addition (winning) (YES), it increments the AT point counter by 1 (S441), and according to the AT point counter value. The effect data is set (S442), and the start command reception process is ended.

Here, the effect data according to the in-AT point counter value is effect data for causing the above-described arch cover 324 and the light emission display unit 325 to emit light according to the current value of the in-AT point counter. For example, the above-mentioned movable part 309 is controlled so that when the normal game is transferred to the AT game, it moves from the initial position to the effect position, and accordingly, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are visible. It Then, when the AT point counter value becomes 1, the effect data for lighting the light emitting display section 325 in one step is set, and when the AT point counter value becomes 2, the light emitting display section 325 is lighted in two steps. When the AT effect point counter value becomes 3 and the AT effect point counter value becomes 3, the effect data for lighting and displaying the light emitting display section 325 in three stages is set, and when the AT effect point counter value becomes 4, the arch cover 324 is turned on. The effect data for the lighting display is set.
As a result, the player can recognize the acquired in-AT points during the AT game.

  Further, when the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less when the AT management points acquired during the AT game are cumulatively added and the acquired AT management points become 4 points, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. Even if it is, the AT game can be performed (continue) again (that is, the right to continue the AT game is granted), but even if the obtained AT midpoint points are less than 4 points, this is acquired. At-AT points can be carried over to at least the next AT game.

  The above-mentioned movable part 309 is controlled so as to move from the effect position to the initial position when the AT game shifts to the normal game, and accordingly, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 become invisible. It Therefore, in the normal game, it is not possible to recognize the carry-over AT point.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during AT game, lottery of AT points is performed, the results are accumulated and stored, and the stored AT points are a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points). In that case, since the AT game is configured to continue, as the AT game continues for a long time, the possibility that the AT game will continue will increase, so that the expectation of addition during AT game does not become monotonous, The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, even if the stored AT midpoint is less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the AT midpoint can be carried over at least until the next AT game. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the AT game ends, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine.

  In addition, in the normal games other than the AT game, since it is configured not to notify the AT points that have been carried over, the player who starts the game from the normal game also plays the game with expectation. It becomes possible.

<Processing during loading state>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the during-addition-state process executed in step S434 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the addition state management counter (S450). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the additional state management counter is 10 or more (S451). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is 10 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the addition state AT number addition lottery process (S452) and ends the addition state process. Here, in the AT number addition lottery process at the time of introducing the additional state, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference number counter. Although illustration is omitted, when the AT number addition lottery process at the time of introduction of the addition state is executed, a video to celebrate the transition to the addition state or the continuation of the addition state is displayed. Performance data is set.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is not 10 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the addition state point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 37, and based on the internal winning combination, the point addition value. Is determined (S453), and the determined point addition value is added to the added-state point counter (S454).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the point counter during the addition state is 100 or more (S455). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during the addition state is 100 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the addition time AT number addition lottery table shown in FIG. 36, and based on the addition state management counter value, The AT count addition value is determined (S456), the determined AT count addition value is added to the AT management difference number counter (S457), the add-on state point counter is decremented by 100 (S458), and the add-on state management counter is added. An initial value (for example, 12) is set (S459), and the in-addition state process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during the addition state is not 100 or more (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition state management counter is 0 (S460). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is 0 (YES), it clears the addition state point counter (S461), clears the addition state (S462), and ends the addition state process. To do. Also, when it is determined that the addition state management counter is not 0 (NO), the addition state process is ended.

<Process during pseudo probability change state>
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-probability variation state process executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the falling wait flag is on (S470). Here, the fall wait flag is a flag that is turned on in step S480 to be described later, and in the control of the main CPU 51, "pseudo probability variation state 1" or "pseudo probability variation state 1" is set as the effect game state. However, in the control of the sub CPU 81, it is a flag for identifying that the pseudo-probability variation state has already ended. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall wait flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S473.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is on (YES), then the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S471). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (YES), it sets the pseudo probability changing state falling navigation data (S472), and ends the pseudo probability changing state process. Here, the pseudo probability change state fall navigation data is such that when the internal winning combination is either the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4, the stop operation order that the bell lip wins (see FIG. 19). ) Is data for informing.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S471 that the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S473. That is, the sub CPU 81, even if the fall wait flag is on, if the internal winning combination does not include Belllip, by executing a pseudo game, or in the process of step S473 described later, The addition lottery for the number of ATs is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes AT number addition lottery processing (S473) during the pseudo probability variation state. In the pseudo probability variation state AT number addition lottery process, regardless of whether or not the pseudo game is executed, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is set. It is added to the AT management difference number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo game is executed (S474). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is not executed (NO), the process proceeds to step S482.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the “pseudo probability changing state 2” (S475). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (YES), the process proceeds to step S482.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S475 that the effect game state is not the "pseudo-probability variation state 2" (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the fall wait flag is on (S476). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall wait flag is ON (YES), the process during the pseudo-probability variation state ends.

  If the sub CPU 81 determines in step S476 that the fall wait flag is not on (NO), it subtracts 1 from the pseudo-probability-change-state management counter (S477), and then the pseudo-probability-change-state management counter is 0? It is determined whether or not (S478). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo-probability variation state management counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability variation state management counter is 0 (YES), it refers to the pseudo probability variation state end lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 30 and based on the internal winning combination. , Transition state is determined (S479). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the probability variation end has been completed, that is, whether or not the probability variation end has been determined as the transition state (S480). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the probability change end is not determined as the transition state (the probability change continuation is determined) (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S480 that the probability change end has been determined as the transition state (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the fall wait flag (S481).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (S482). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not one of the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (YES), it sets the pseudo probability variation state maintaining navigation data (S483), and ends the pseudo probability variation state process. Further, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination does not include Belllip (NO), the sub-probability variation state processing is ended. Here, the pseudo probability variation state maintaining navigation data notifies the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19) in which the bell lip does not win when the internal winning combination is either the normal lip 1 to 4 or the bell lip 1 to 4. It is data for doing.

<Processing during normal game>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal game process executed in step S443 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the definite winning combination (S490).
Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the internal winning combination is cherry rip, strong cherry rip, or strong bell. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is the final winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not the final winning combination (NO), the normal game number counter is incremented by 1 (S491), and subsequently, the normal game number counter = the ceiling game number is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal game has reached the above ceiling game number (ceiling game number exhaustion). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter = the number of ceiling games (YES), it executes an AT rush process (S493) described later in the description of FIG. 73, and proceeds to the process of step S499.

  When determining in step S492 that the normal game number counter does not equal the ceiling game number (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the normal game number counter is 1 (S494). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game after the AT game is over. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game number counter is 1 (YES), it refers to the mode suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 32, and based on the current mode, the mode suggestion effect (for example, mode suggestion). The effect data corresponding to any of effects 1 to 9) is determined (S495), and the process proceeds to step S499.

On the other hand, when determining that the normal game number counter is not 1 (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the 1s place of the normal game number counter is 0 (S496).
When the sub CPU 81 determines that the 1's digit of the normal game number counter is not 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S499.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S496 that the 1's place of the normal game number counter is 0 (YES), it calculates the remaining game number by the ceiling game number-normal game number counter (S497), and the figure By referring to the remaining game number suggesting effect lottery table shown in 33, the remaining game number suggesting effect (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the mode suggesting effects 1 to 10) is determined based on the remaining game number (S498). ). In the present embodiment, the remaining game number suggesting effect is thus executed for every 10 games in the normal game.

  Next, if the effect data has not been set, that is, if the effect data has not been determined, the sub CPU 81 sets effect data according to an internal winning combination or the like (S499), and ends the normal game process.

<Processing at AT entry>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the AT rush time processing executed in step S493 of the normal game processing shown in FIG. 72 and step S525 of the lock command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data upon entry into the AT (S510). Here, the AT rush-time effect data is effect data for notifying that the normal game is transferred to the AT game, and is for performing control for moving the above-mentioned movable part 309 from the initial position to the effect position. This is production data.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT game from the next game (S511) and increments the AT management difference number counter by 150 (S512).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the mode shift lottery, determines the next mode from modes A to C (S513), and determines the next ceiling game number based on the determined mode (S514). ), The normal game number counter is cleared (S515), and the AT entry process is terminated.

  In the process of step S512, the sub CPU 81 replaces the process of adding 150 to the AT management difference number counter (giving the basic continuation number described above), and replaces a plurality of AT management difference number counter values (for example, 100, 150, or 200), the value of the AT management difference number counter to be added by lottery may be determined and the addition processing may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the basic number of times of continuation to be given and diversify the number of times of continuation of the AT game.

<Process when receiving lock command>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the lock command reception process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a special reel action is executed (S520). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is executed. When determining that the special reel action is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the AT number addition value corresponding to the type of the special reel action to the AT management difference number counter (S521), and receives the lock command. The time processing ends. Here, for example, when the special reel action 1 is executed, the AT number addition value is 0, and the AT number is not actually added, but when the special reel action 2 is executed, the AT number is When 300 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter and special reel action 3 is executed, 400 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter and 400 is added to the AT management difference number counter. When action 4 is executed, 500 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter as the AT number addition value.

  In the process of step S521, the sub CPU 81 replaces the process of adding the value of the AT management difference number counter according to the type of the special reel action (giving the number of additional continuations described above) with a plurality of AT management targets. The value of the AT management difference sheet counter to be added by lottery may be determined from the value of the difference sheet counter (for example, 300, 400, 500, or 1000), and the addition processing may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the number of times of continuous addition to be given and diversify the number of times of continuous AT game.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special reel action is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (S522). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel action 9 or 10 will be executed (YES), it sets an initial value (for example, 3) in the pseudo-probability variation state management counter (S523), and ends the lock command reception process. To do.

  When determining in step S522 that the reel action 9 or 10 is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (S524). . When the sub CPU 81 determines that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (YES), it executes the AT entry time process (S525) shown in FIG. 73, and ends the lock command reception process. .

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S524 that any one of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S526). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination is determined (YES), it executes the AT number addition lottery based on the pseudo internal winning combination and adds the lottery result to the AT management difference number counter. (S527), the lock command reception process is terminated.

  When determining in step S526 that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the lock data after all stops are executed (S528). That is, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game end lock is executed due to the stop operation being performed by the push-up lock addition order.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S528 that the lock data after all stops are executed (YES), it executes the AT time after all stops addition AT lottery process (S529) to perform the lock command reception process. finish. The sub CPU 81 also ends the lock command reception process when it determines that the lock data is not executed after the entire stop (NO). In the lock time AT number addition lottery process after all stop, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, the AT number addition value by lottery (for example, determines any one of 100 to 500 as the AT number addition value), and obtains the lottery result. It is added to the AT management difference number counter. It should be noted that the specific benefit provided when the lock data is executed after the entire stop is not limited to this. For example, as a specific benefit, the sub CPU 81 may be controlled to shift to the above-mentioned additional state. Further, for example, as a specific benefit, the main CPU 51 may control the pseudo-probability-changed state to set a special value (for example, 10) in the pseudo-probability-changed state management counter.

<Processing when winning command is received>
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT game is in progress (S540). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is not being performed (NO), the winning operation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is being performed (YES), then the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the addition state (S541). When the sub CPU 81 determines that it is in the additional state (YES), the winning operation command reception process is ended. In the present embodiment, in this way, the subtraction process of the AT management difference number counter (see step S546 described later) is not executed in the addition state.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S541 that it is not in the additional state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a BAR lip and a prize other than the left first stop (S542). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether BAR rip 1 or BAR rip 2 is determined as an internal winning combination, and wins one of the winning replays by performing a first stop operation other than the left reel 3L. Determine whether or not. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination has won a prize other than the BAR rip and the left first stop (YES), the additional state is set from the next game (S543), and the initial state is set in the additional state management counter (S543). For example, 12) is set (S544), and the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command is ended.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S542 that the internal winning combination has not won any prize other than the BAR lip and the left first stop (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not the small winning combination has been won. (S545). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has not been won (NO), the winning operation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has been won (YES), the difference management calculated from the payout number (see FIGS. 14a and 14b) -inserted number (for example, 3) is AT managed. It is subtracted from the difference sheet counter (S546). In this embodiment, in this way, the difference number management in the AT game is realized.

  In addition, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether or not any of the bells is won, not whether or not the small winning combination is won. Specifically, as the internal winning combination, one of the "push-order small combination", "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that one of the bells has been won, regardless of whether or not the payout is actually made, "7" is set as the payout number, and the process of step S546 is executed. It may be that. That is, the AT management difference number counter may be a counter that is updated when the "push order small winning combination" is won. With such a configuration, for example, in the AT game, between the player who performed the stop operation by ignoring the notified stop operation order, and the player who performed the stop operation by observing the notified stop operation order, Since there is a difference in the profits to be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the sub CPU 81 may execute the process of step S546 by performing the same determination as that of step S238 of the AT state management process shown in FIG.
Specifically, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 determines not whether or not the small winning combination is won, but whether or not any of the bells is winning, and when it is determined that any of the bells is winning. The processing of step S546 may be executed. In the present embodiment, in S239 subsequent to step S238 described above, the AT game winning number counter is incremented by 1, and when the AT game winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (for example, 38), the external signal 1 is turned off. (See FIG. 53). That is, with such a configuration, it is possible to synchronize the condition in which the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 changes (for example, from ON to OFF) and the condition in which the AT game in the sub CPU 51 ends. it can. In this case, it is desirable to synchronize the conditions for starting the AT game in the sub CPU 51 with the conditions for changing the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 (for example, from OFF to ON).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the AT management difference number counter is 0 or less (S547). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is not 0 or less (NO), the winning operation command reception process is ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is 0 or less (YES), subsequently, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT midpoint counter is 4 or more (S548).

When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT midpoint counter is 4 or more (YES), the AT midpoint difference counter is incremented by 150 (S549), the AT midpoint counter is decremented by 4 (S550), and the prize is won. The process at the time of receiving the operation command is ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during AT is not 4 or more (NO), it sets the normal game from the next game, and sets the determined mode and ceiling game number (S551).
, When the winning operation command is received, the processing is ended. In this embodiment, in this way, the AT game is to be continued based on the AT midpoint points.

  The determination as to whether or not the AT mid-point counter is 4 or more is not limited to that executed at the end of the AT game. For example, in the processing at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 69, the stock counter indicating that the AT game continues for one set based on the point counter during AT becoming 4 (that is, the right to continue the AT game) 1 is added, and at the end of the AT game, it is determined whether or not this stock counter is 1 or more, and if the stock counter is 1 or more, control to continue one set of AT game may be performed. Good. In this case, instead of the effect data for displaying the arch cover 324 described above, or together with this, effect data for notifying that one set of the AT game will continue is set, and during the AT game, the AT game is set. May notify that one set continues.

[Other Embodiments of Pachi-Slot Machine]
In the present embodiment, special reel actions 1 to 4, reel actions 1 to 14, or a pseudo game is adopted as the reel production (symbol variation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, other embodiments can be adopted as the reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode). Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, a reel effect (effect according to a symbol variation mode) according to another embodiment will be described. Note that in the description of FIGS. 76 to 79, the description of the content overlapping the content already described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 75 is omitted.

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the lock lottery processing executed in step S15 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 42 in the other embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A (S560). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When determining that the internal winning combination does not include the cherry lip A (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the special reel action (S561), turns on the special control flag (S562), and ends the lock lottery process. To do. The condition for setting the special reel action in step S561 is not limited to the case where it is determined that the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A. For example, whether to execute the special reel action is simply determined. The lottery may be performed and the determination may be made based on the result of the lottery.

<Game execution lock execution process>
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing a game start time lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S565). When determining that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start time lock execution process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action is determined (YES), then it determines whether the left stop button is on (S565). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the player has pressed the left stop button 17L (pseudo stop operation) and the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is turned on. When determining that the left stop button is not on (off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock execution process. Here, for example, in the special reel action, each reel starts pseudo-rotation in the same manner as normal rotation by normal rotation (that is, at the same or substantially the same rotation speed as the normal rotation), and the effect described later. When the value of the timer becomes 0, it is a symbol variation mode in which each reel starts normal rotation as it is.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in step S566 that the left stop button is on (YES), it sets the effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position (S567), and ends the game start lock execution process. To do. Here, the pseudo stop start position indicates a symbol position when the left stop button 17L is operated during execution of the special reel action (for example, symbol position data located in the middle stage of the left reel 3L).

In addition, setting the production timer according to the pseudo stop start position means that the pseudo stop start position is in the middle of the left reel 3L when the "cherry" symbol is stopped (symbol position data is 12 and 17) It indicates that the effect timer is set according to whether or not the player is away. For example, when the value of the effect timer for one symbol is "17" (about 0.019 seconds), the position where the "cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position in the middle of the left reel 3L is one symbol. If separated, "17" (about 0.019 seconds) is set as the value of the production timer, and the position where the "cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position are 14 symbols in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. If they are separated, "238 (17 x 14)" (about 0.266 seconds) is set as the value of the production timer.
Here, if the value of the pulse counter required to move one symbol (the symbol counter is incremented by 1) is "17", that is, in the special reel action, as the value of the effect timer, " A value corresponding to an integral multiple of the time required to move one symbol will be set depending on how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops.

  In other embodiments, the value of the effect timer is set according to how many symbols are separated from the pseudo stop start position as viewed from the position where the "cherry" symbol is stopped, but this is not the only option. However, the value of the effect timer may be set according to the lottery. Specifically, the same lottery value is assigned to the symbol position data “0” to “19” to perform the lottery (for example, the lottery value “12” is assigned to each symbol position data, 12 / One symbol position data is determined by lottery with a probability of 256. Further, the lottery value "16" which is a fraction of the lottery value when the lottery value "12" is assigned to each symbol position data is again the symbol The position data is re-lottered.), The value of the effect timer according to the determined symbol position data (for example, as a result of the lottery, the pseudo stop start position as seen from the symbol position according to the determined symbol position data) Depending on how many symbols are separated, it is possible to set the value of the effect timer that will cause the execution of the game start lock to end. Further, the lottery at the symbol position, which means that the execution of the game start lock ends, may be performed at the start operation.

  Further, in the other embodiments, the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are replaced by the middle reel. The reel 3C, the middle stop button 17R, or the right reel 3L, the right stop button 17R may perform the same processing, or all of them may perform the same processing.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the input port check processing executed in step S321 of the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. Since the processing of steps S570 to S573 in FIG. 78 is the same as the processing of steps S330 to S333 in FIG. 56, description thereof will be omitted.

  The main CPU 51 determines whether the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (S574). When it is determined that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the input port check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the left stop button is on (S575). That is, the main CPU 51 turns on the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L based on the player pressing the left stop button 17L during the execution of the special reel action, and when the special reel action ends. Then, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L remains in the ON state based on the fact that the pressing operation is continued. When determining that the left stop button is not on (off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the input port check processing.

  When determining in step S575 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 requests the output of a special on-edge signal (S576), and ends the input port check processing. Here, to request the output of the special on-edge signal means that the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is pseudo-output even if the left stop button 3L is still pressed. Is requested or the ON edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is once turned off and then turned on again.

  In the present embodiment, normally, after the processing of step S20 of FIG. 42, the stop operation to each reel is permitted based on the fact that each reel is rotated at a constant speed, and then the input port check is performed. In the process, based on the fact that the on-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S, the execution of the reel stop control corresponding to the operated stop button is started. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, by performing the processing of step S576, even if the stop button is still pressed, the stop switch 17S is assigned. On-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port. Here, even if the stop button is still pressed, the mode in which the on-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S is not limited to this. For example, at a timing when the stop operation to each reel is permitted, it is constantly monitored whether or not the stop switch 17S is on, and if it is on, execution of stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is executed. It is good to start. In this case, the processes of steps S574 to S576 are unnecessary.

  Thus, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, each reel starts pseudo rotation by forward rotation, and when a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a specific symbol position (for example, , The "cherry" symbol is stopped in the middle stage) and the pseudo stop start position (for example, the symbol position in the middle stage when the pseudo stop operation is performed), the effect timer is set. When the value of the production timer becomes 0, a reel stop request signal (for example, a special on-edge signal) is output even if the player keeps pressing the stop button, and the reel is placed at a specific symbol position. Will be stopped.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the other embodiment, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces is changed by using the reel effect, so that the interest for the stop operation is significantly increased. It is possible to improve.

  Also, the combination of the symbols related to the cherry lip A is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", and the player can easily hold the left stop button 17L during the special reel action by holding it. The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the left reel 3L. That is, since it is possible to easily detect that a specific winning combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed winning combination) has been established, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the internal winning combination is cherry lip or strong cherry lip, even if the combination of symbols related to cherry lip A is not stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols related to another replay is always stopped and displayed. (See FIGS. 17 and 19), the player does not suffer any particular disadvantage. Therefore, even if it is possible to easily stop the "cherry" symbol in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, the adjustment does not impair the fairness of the game.

<Production of continuation of stop operation>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation continuation suggesting effect according to another embodiment. Here, the stop operation continuation suggestive effect is, for example, a case where a special reel action is determined in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, and lock command data including that is generated, 57 shows an effect which is stored in the communication data storage area and is controlled by the sub CPU 81 when the lock command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the communication data transmission process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the sub CPU 81 performs control so that, for example, when the special reel action is executed, an image of “Keep pressing the left stop button!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. After that, when the left stop button 3L is pseudo-stopped and the effect timer is set to 0 while the left stop button 3L is still pressed, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. .

  As described above, in the other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the notification that the pressing of the stop button based on the pseudo stop operation should be continued is performed. Based on this, it is possible to surely enjoy the effect that can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces was changed. In addition, when the establishment of a specific winning combination (for example, the fixed winning combination described above) is a condition for executing a special reel action, the player is notified that the specific winning combination (for example, the fixed winning combination described above) has been established. It can be surely enjoyed.

  As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machine can be provided.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, by the main CPU 51). Internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and displayed on the symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to a combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) Advantageous game state control means (e.g., sub CPU 81) that controls an advantageous game state advantageous for a player (e.g., AT game) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. And a notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the lamp group 21, the speakers 20L and 20R) for performing notification of a plurality of types of information to the player, and notification control for controlling the notification performed by the notification means. Means (for example, sub CPU81), and, the advantageous game state control means, at least in the normal game state different from the advantageous game state that a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, in the normal game , The ceiling game count has been exhausted) as the predetermined start condition, and the notification control means plays the specified number of games in the normal game state. Every time (for example, 10 games) is played, a plurality of pieces of specific notification data (for example, remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 10) are based on the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) up to the predetermined number of games. When one specific notification data is determined from among the effect data corresponding to (1), the notification unit executes the notification according to the determined specific notification data, and the specific notification data is determined by the notification control unit. , The specific notification data is determined with a different determination rate for each range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games (for example, referring to the remaining game number suggestive effect lottery table shown in FIG. 33, the number of remaining games The production data corresponding to the suggestive production is determined).

  According to this gaming machine, in the normal game state (for example, the normal game), a notification (for example, remaining game number suggesting effect) according to the specific notification data is executed every time a specific number of games are played. As a result, it is possible to add a new game property of estimating the number of games remaining until it is possible to shift to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, as the number of games in the normal game state (for example, the normal game) increases, the notification (for example, remaining game number suggesting effect) corresponding to the larger number of specific notification data is executed. Therefore, a player with a large number of games can more accurately grasp the number of remaining games, which can promote the operation of the gaming machine.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, in order to estimate the number of remaining games until it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), a notification according to one specific notification data (for example, the number of remaining games In some cases, it can be estimated by executing the suggestion effect), and in some cases, it can be estimated by executing a plurality of notifications according to the specific notification data (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect). (For example, the number of remaining games suggestive effect) itself can be significantly improved in interest.

  The plurality of specific notification data are at least the first specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to any of the remaining game number suggesting effects 1 to 3) and the second specific notification data (for example, remaining games). Production data corresponding to the number suggesting effect 4), third specific notification data (for example, production data corresponding to the remaining game number suggesting effect 5) and fourth specific notification data (for example, remaining game number suggesting effect 8 to 10) When the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is within a predetermined range (for example, the remaining number of games is within 240 games), the notification control means includes Only, the first specific notification data is determined with a predetermined probability, the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the first range (for example, remaining When the number of games is in the range of 101 to 240 games, or the number of remaining games is in the range of 31 to 50 games), the second specific notification data is generated with a first probability (for example, a probability of 2000/32768). The second probability lower than the first probability when determined and also within the second range (for example, the number of remaining games is 51 to 100, or the number of remaining games is 11 to 30). The second specific notification data is determined with a probability (for example, 100/32768 probability), and the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the second range. When it is, the third specific notification data is determined with the first probability, and when the first range, the third specific notification data is determined with the second probability, The predetermined number of games A third probability that is lower than the first probability and higher than the second probability when the range of the number of games until reaching is outside the predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is 241 games or more) (For example, the probability of 300/32768) determines the second specific notification data or the third specific notification data, and the range of the number of games until reaching the predetermined number of games is any range. , A predetermined probability and a fourth probability higher than the first probability (eg, 10000/32768 probability, 9300/32768 probability, 9000/32768 probability, 10522/32768 probability, or 10524/32768 probability). Probability) determines the fourth specific notification data, a gaming machine.

  According to this gaming machine, by making the determination of the specific notification data complicated, it is possible to prevent monotonousness in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming). However, the playability can be made more diverse.

  A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) and a profit according to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means A gaming machine provided with a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and an informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Then, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), an internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing and the reel control by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Process) and a stop operation of the player (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), based on a stop change of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a symbol variation stop control means (for example, a main The reel stop control process and the reel control process by the CPU 51 and that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, “strong chance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and “special lip A1 to 6” or “special lip B”). Based on which one of the symbols is stopped), the game state is changed from the normal game state (for example, "normal game state") to the first game state (for example, "main CZ state 1"). In the first game state, if a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state. A game state transition control means for shifting the game state from the first game state to the normal game state when the specific transition condition is not satisfied (for example, "AT state") For example, a state management process by the main CPU 51) and a main effecting means (for example, effect by the reel actions 1 to 8) in the first game state, which is effected by the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, Reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) and lock execution means for executing a lock for invalidating the game operation by the player in the first game state according to the effect of the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means. For example, a main control means (for example, the main CPU 51) including the game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51), When the game state is controlled by the game state transition control means to the second game state, the sub-means means (for example, by the sub CPU 81) that informs the advantageous stop operation information relating to the addition of the game medium by the notifying means. A sub-control unit (for example, sub CPU 81) including a start command reception process) is provided, and the specific transition condition is that the main production unit produces an effect in a specific symbol variation mode (eg, reel action). 5-8 is executed).

  According to this gaming machine, by granting a privilege (for example, shifting to AT game) according to the type of effect (for example, reel action) according to the pattern variation mode executed at the time of lock execution, in particular, for locking The expectation in the chance zone state (for example, “main CZ state 1”) in which execution is easy can be significantly improved.

  The main effect means determines the symbol variation mode based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each game in the first game state (for example, during a normal game by the main CPU 51). The reel action in the lottery process is determined), and the game state transition control means is a case where the specific symbol variation mode (for example, reel actions 5 to 8) is not determined by the main effector, and a predetermined symbol variation. When the mode (for example, reel action 3 or 4) is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the high-probability first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 2"), and the main effect means is the high-probability first. In one gaming state, the specific symbol variation mode is determined with a higher probability than in the first gaming state (for example, the main CZ state reel by the main CPU 51). Gaming machine, characterized in that the lottery) by transfection lottery table.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the mode of the effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode to improve the interest of the game, and at the same time, the effect of the symbol variation mode to which the privilege is given ( For example, even in the case where the reel action 5-8) at which the AT game is started is not determined, in the chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2") in which the lock is easily executed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in expectations.

  Further, the effect by the symbol variation mode changes the symbol stepwise in a mode (for example, reverse rotation) different from the symbol variation started by the symbol variation start control means (for example, one reel for each stage It is to be changed in 6 stages), and the effect of the specific symbol variation mode and the effect of the predetermined symbol variation mode are different in the stage of varying the symbol (for example, 5 stages in reel actions 5 and 7, reel. In each of the actions 6 and 8, each reel is changed in 6 stages, whereas in the reel action 3, each reel is changed in 3 stages, and in the reel action 4, each reel is changed in 4 stages).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to gradually improve the player's sense of expectation when the effect (eg, reel action) in the symbol variation mode is executed, and intuitively determine the degree of advantage to the player. Can be grasped.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, by the main CPU 51). Internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and displayed on the symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to a combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) Advantageous game state control means (e.g., sub CPU 81) that controls an advantageous game state advantageous for a player (e.g., AT game) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. And a gaming machine comprising: a point based on a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any one of bell rep 1 to 4) being determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous game state. A point number giving means for giving a number (for example, a start command reception process by the sub CPU 81), and a point number storage means for cumulatively storing the number of points given by the point number giving means (for example, an AT midpoint counter) Based on that the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means has reached a predetermined number (eg, “4”), Continuing right granting means for granting the right to continue the gaming state (for example, the processing of S549 in the winning operation command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the right to continue the advantageous gaming state by the continuing right granting means Based on that, the point number updating means for subtracting the predetermined number from the point number stored by the point number storage means (for example, the processing of S550 in the winning operation command reception time processing under the control of the sub CPU 81), And the advantageous game state control means continues the advantageous game state by the continuation right granting means when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less). If the right to be granted is granted, the advantageous game card is until the predetermined ending condition is satisfied again. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the number of points less than the predetermined number is stored, the advantageous game state control means controls at least the next time. A gaming machine characterized by carrying over the stored number of points until it is controlled to an advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, one of Bell Reps 1 to 4) is determined during an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), points (for example, AT midpoint) are awarded. During the advantageous game state (for example, AT game), the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) is configured to continue when the number of points given and stored reaches a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game without the monotonous expectation of addition.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when the stored points (for example, AT points) are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the points are stored at least in the next advantageous game state. Since it is configured to carry over to (for example, AT game), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the advantageous game state ends, which contributes to the improvement of the operation of the game machine. Become.

  In addition, in the advantageous game state, point number informing means for informing the number of points stored in the point number storage means (for example, arch cover 324 and light emitting display unit 325 controlled by the sub CPU 81) is further provided, and The point number notifying means does not notify the point number in a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal game) when the point number is carried over by the point number storage means (for example, a sub A game machine characterized by moving the movable part 309 from the effect position to the initial position under the control of the CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, the gaming state (for example, normal gaming) other than the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) is configured not to notify the point that is carried over (for example, AT midpoint), It is possible for a player who starts a game from a normal game to play the game with expectation.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub CPU81), normal game operation detection means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and a pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game. Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detection means for detecting pseudo game operation by the player in the pseudo game, such as bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions Based on the establishment of the game, the game is played for a predetermined number of times. Advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous for, and the normal game operation detection means, as the normal game operation, at least a start operation (for example, , Operation to the start lever 16) and stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on the detection of the start operation. Based on the fact that the start operation is detected and the symbol variation starting means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning combination is performed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. Based on the, the symbol variation stop means for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, reel stop control processing by the main CPU 51 and Reel control processing), and when the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stopping means, a profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) that gives a profit according to the stopped symbol combination Medal payout processing), and in the advantageous game state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a normal game addition determining means (for example, to determine whether or not to increase the predetermined number of games) , The process of S474 in the process during the pseudo-probability variation state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal state in the advantageous game state. Lock determination means for determining whether to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period (for example, lottery process during pseudo-probability variation state by the main CPU 51), and the lock determination means determines execution of the lock. Based on that, the lock execution means for executing the lock (for example, the game start time lock execution processing by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo game operation detection means, the lock execution means performs the lock. If it is, it is possible to detect the pseudo game operation (for example, the operation to the MAX bet button 15A, the operation to the start lever 16, the operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the pseudo game control means. When the lock is executed once by the lock executing means, the pseudo game number is determined to determine the pseudo game number. When the stage (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo game number determined by the pseudo game number determining means are not 0 (for example, the pseudo game number counter is not 0), the pseudo game operation is performed. Based on the detection of the pseudo internal winning combination, a pseudo internal winning combination determining means (for example, a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous game state. Based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by, the pseudo game addition determining means (for example, the processing of S527 in the lock command reception processing under the control of the sub CPU 81) for determining whether or not to add the predetermined number of games , And the pseudo game number determination means determines a plurality of pseudo game numbers (for example, the pseudo game number lottery). Based on Buru, gaming machine, which is a pseudo-game number determination) possible.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and normal game control means (for example, main CPU 51 and Sub CPU81), normal game operation detection means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting a normal game operation by the player in the normal game, and a pseudo game control for controlling the progress of the pseudo game. Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detection means for detecting pseudo game operation by the player in the pseudo game, such as bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions Based on the establishment of the game, the game is played for a predetermined number of times. Advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous for, and the normal game operation detection means, as the normal game operation, at least a start operation (for example, , Operation to the start lever 16) and stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the normal game control means is based on the detection of the start operation. Based on the fact that the start operation is detected and the symbol variation starting means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning combination is performed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. Based on the, the symbol variation stop means for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, reel stop control processing by the main CPU 51 and Reel control processing), and when the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stopping means, a profit giving means (for example, by the main CPU 51) that gives a profit according to the stopped symbol combination Medal payout processing), and in the advantageous game state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a normal game addition determining means (for example, to determine whether or not to increase the predetermined number of games) , The process of S474 in the process during the pseudo-probability variation state under the control of the sub CPU 81) and the normal state in the advantageous game state. Lock determination means for determining whether to execute a lock for invalidating a game operation for a predetermined period (for example, lottery process during pseudo-probability variation state by the main CPU 51), and the lock determination means determines execution of the lock. Based on that, the lock execution means for executing the lock (for example, the game start time lock execution processing by the main CPU 51), and the pseudo game operation detection means, the lock execution means performs the lock. If it is, it is possible to detect the pseudo game operation (for example, the operation to the MAX bet button 15A, the operation to the start lever 16, the operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), and the pseudo game control means. When the lock is executed once by the lock executing means, the pseudo game number is determined to determine the pseudo game number. When the stage (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo game number determined by the pseudo game number determining means are not 0 (for example, the pseudo game number counter is not 0), the pseudo game operation is performed. Based on the detection of the pseudo internal winning combination, a pseudo internal winning combination determining means (for example, a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous game state. Based on the pseudo internal winning combination determined by, the pseudo game addition determining means (for example, the process of S527 in the lock command reception process under the control of the sub CPU 81) for determining whether to add the predetermined number of games , The first mode (for example, "pseudo-probability variation state 1") and the pseudo game relative to the first mode. The second mode in which the number of pseudo games determined by the number determination means is large (for example, "pseudo-probability variation state 2") is based on a predetermined transition condition (for example, whether or not a high-probability transition lottery is won). And a mode shift means for shifting, and the pseudo game number determination means always determines a plurality of pseudo game numbers when the mode shift means shifts to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized by.

  Further, the pseudo game operation detection means detects at least a pseudo start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16) and a pseudo stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) as the pseudo game operation. It is possible, the pseudo internal winning combination determination means determines a pseudo internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo game control means determines that the pseudo operation has been detected. Based on the pseudo symbol variation start means (for example, the pseudo game process and the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) that pseudo-starts the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and the pseudo stop operation is detected. Based on that, the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the pseudo internal winning combination determined by the pseudo internal winning combination determination means. Pseudo-pseudo symbol variation stopping means for stopping (e.g., pseudo-game process and the reel effect control process of the main CPU 51) a gaming machine, characterized in that a, further comprising a.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, during the pseudo-probability variation state, the number of advantageous game states based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) is not limited to the chance of additional lottery, but also the advantageous game state based on the pseudo internal winning combination. Since the chance of additional lottery for the number of times (for example, the number of ATs) will also be given, it is possible to expect multiple additional lottery during one unit game, and improve the interest of the game related to additional ride. You can

  Further, according to this gaming machine, by utilizing the pseudo game, for example, the lottery can be generated a plurality of times in a time shorter than the prescribed time set in the gaming machine, so that, for example, the pseudo-probability variation state It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state, which is advantageous to the player.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, in the second mode (for example, "pseudo-probability variation state 2"), when the pseudo game is executed, the number of times of pseudo games is always plural (for example, 2 or more). Since it is decided, it is possible to enjoy the opportunity of additional lottery more than once in the number of advantageous game states (for example, the number of ATs) based on the pseudo internal winning combination. The lottery status can be diversified.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, by the main CPU 51). Internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and displayed on the symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to a combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) , Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) for controlling to a advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, In the advantageous game state, a game number management means for managing the predetermined number of games (for example, management of an AT management difference number counter by the sub CPU 81), and a specific start condition being satisfied in the advantageous game state ( For example, "BAR REP 1" or "BAR REP 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and by performing the first stop operation on the reels other than the left reel 3L, one of the winning replays is won and the addition state is 2 Based on the fact that the game has been exhausted), until a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games are exhausted, or the additional state continues), An additional game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) for controlling an additional game state (for example, an additional state) that is a game state in which a predetermined number of times of game is added, and the game number management means includes the additional game state. In the above, the predetermined number of games is not updated (for example, the process of S541 in the process of receiving the winning operation command under the control of the sub CPU 81), and the additional game state control means determines the identification in the additional game state. Until the end condition is satisfied, a point number determination means for randomly determining the number of points for each game (for example, a process during the addition state by the sub CPU 81), and the point number determined by the point number determination means are cumulatively stored. Point number storage means (for example, a point counter during the addition state) and the point number storage means When a number of points equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, “100”) is stored by, the additional game number determining means for determining the additional game number to be added to the predetermined number of games (for example, the process during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) ), And when the number of points of the predetermined number or more is stored by the number-of-points storage means and the specific end condition is satisfied, the additional game is repeated until the specific end condition is satisfied again. When the additional game state continuation means for continuing the state (for example, the processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) and the number of points exceeding the predetermined number are stored by the point number storage means, the specific ending condition is When it is established, in the additional game state continued by the additional game state continuation means, the amount exceeding the predetermined number Gaming machine which comprises a number of points carryover means carried over Into number (e.g., the processing of S458 in the plus state processing by the control of the sub CPU 81), a.

  According to this gaming machine, the additional game state (for example, the additional state) functions as a state in which the number of advantageous game states (for example, the number of ATs) is increased, and also functions as a state in which medals are increased. Therefore, even if it is not possible to increase the number of advantageous game states in the additional game state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by surely allowing the player to enjoy the benefit of increasing medals. it can. Also, when the addition state continues, points to be cumulatively added during the addition state (for example, points during the addition state) can be carried over, so that there is no waste in the lottery result during the addition state, It is possible to further improve the expectation of lottery during the loading state.

  Further, the specific ending condition is that the point number storage means stores a predetermined number of points or more, or the point number storage means does not store the predetermined number of points or more and a specific game. The number of times the game has been played, and the additional game number determination means is the number of times in the additional game state that the point number storage means stores the number of points equal to or more than the predetermined number. The game machine characterized in that the number of additional games is determined based on whether the game is a game (for example, an additional state management counter value).

  According to this gaming machine, in the add-on game state (for example, the add-on state), the add-on lottery is prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game is maintained even when the add-on lottery is repeatedly controlled. You can

  A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) and a profit according to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means A gaming machine provided with a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and an informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Then, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), an internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing and the reel control by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Processing) and a stop operation of the player (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), based on a stop operation of the symbols, the symbol variation stop control means (for example, main The reel stop control process and the reel control process by the CPU 51), and a specific internal winning combination (for example, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip” or “strong bell”) is determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Based on the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) that shifts the game state from the next game from the normal game state (for example, the normal game) to the advantageous game state advantageous for the player (for example, the AT game), The specific internal winning combination is a first specific internal winning combination (for example, "strong cherry rip") and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry". "), The internal winning combination determining means determines the first specific internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means determines the second specific internal winning combination. In this case, if the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, if any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the result of the predetermined lottery is non-effective. If it is a winning (for example, if the special reel action 1 is determined), the effect by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game (for example, the special reel action 1). Based on that the specific internal winning combination has been determined by the main winning combination determining means and the internal winning combination determining means (for example, reel production control processing by the main CPU 51). A number of times is given (for example, 150 is added to the AT management difference number counter), a basic continuation number giving means (for example, AT rush-time processing by the sub CPU 81), and the main effect means is used for the first symbol variation mode. A game machine comprising: an addition continuation number giving means (for example, a lock command reception process by the sub CPU 81) for giving the addition continuation number in the advantageous game state based on the effect being produced.

  A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) and a profit according to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means A gaming machine provided with a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and an informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Then, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), an internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing and the reel control by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Processing) and a stop operation of the player (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), based on a stop operation of the symbols, the symbol variation stop control means (for example, main The reel stop control process and the reel control process by the CPU 51), and a specific internal winning combination (for example, “cherry lip”, “strong cherry lip” or “strong bell”) is determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Based on the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) that shifts the game state from the next game from the normal game state (for example, the normal game) to the advantageous game state advantageous for the player (for example, the AT game), The specific internal winning combination is a first specific internal winning combination (for example, "strong cherry rip") and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry". "), The internal winning combination determining means determines the first specific internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means determines the second specific internal winning combination. In this case, if the result of the predetermined lottery is a win (for example, if any of the special reel actions 2 to 4 is determined), the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game. When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the result of the predetermined lottery is non-effective. If it is a winning (for example, if the special reel action 1 is determined), the effect by the second symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means in the next game (for example, the special reel action 1). Main effecting means (for example, reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) and the main effecting means to perform an effect according to the first symbol variation mode or an effect according to the second symbol variation mode. Based on the basic continuation number giving means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for giving a basic continuation number in the advantageous game state (for example, adding 150, 300, 400 or 500 to the AT management difference number counter), The addition continuation number giving means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for giving the addition continuation number in the advantageous game state based on the effect produced by the first symbol variation mode by the outputting means, and the addition continuation A game machine characterized in that the number-of-times granting means grants the right to continue the advantageous gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, the winning of the fixed winning combination is not limited to the one in which the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) is simply generated, and the symbol variation mode is executed in the next game based on the winning of the fixed winning combination. When the effect (for example, special reel action) is performed and the effect (for example, one of the special reel actions 2 to 4) according to the first symbol variation mode is performed, the number of additional continuations added to the basic number of continuations Since it is configured to be added to, the expectation can be improved not only in the game in which the winning combination is won or the prize is won, but also in the next game.

  Further, the symbol fluctuation stop control means, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first specific internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, each reel In the case where the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed) and the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stopping operation is performed at the predetermined timing. With the above, the gaming machine is characterized in that the variation of the symbols is stopped so that at least a part of the symbols constituting the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means is different.

  According to this gaming machine, the player who wants to quickly recognize the type of the final winning combination has a pattern variation mode by pressing each reel at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed). The type can be recognized before the effect is performed. On the other hand, the player who wants to recognize whether the addition is successful (that is, whether the additional continuation number is given) is produced by the effect of the symbol variation mode, and the expectation is further continued by not performing the above-mentioned push. You can play games. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful according to the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform the notification according to the preference of the player regarding the notification of the addition.

  Also, the basic continuation number giving means determines and gives one of the basic continuation times of the plurality of basic continuation times, and the addition continuation number giving means is one of the plurality of addition continuation times. A gaming machine characterized by determining the number of times of continuous addition and giving it.

  According to this gaming machine, the basic number of times of continuation and the number of times of continuation of addition are varied, and the number of continuation of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) can be diversified.

  A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) and a profit according to a combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means A gaming machine provided with a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and an informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Then, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), an internal winning combination determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start processing and the reel control by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Processing) and a stop operation of the player (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R), based on a stop operation of the symbols, the symbol variation stop control means (for example, main Reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the CPU 51), a specific internal winning combination (for example, "strong chance lip") is determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the stop operation is in a specific order (for example, Left first stop), a combination of specific symbols on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, a combination of symbols of "special lip A1-6" or "special lip B") Based on the stop, the game state is changed from the normal game state (eg, “normal game state”) to the first game state (eg, “main CZ state 1”). In the first game state, when a specific transition condition is satisfied during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state (for example, "AT state"), if the specific transition condition is not satisfied, the game state transition control means (for example, the main CPU51) to transition the game state from the first game state to the normal game state State management processing), and in the first game state, main production means (for example, reel by the main CPU 51) for performing production (for example, production by reel actions 1 to 8) according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means. Production control processing) and, in the first game state, invalidate the game operation by the player according to the production by the symbol variation mode performed by the main production means. Specific lock execution means for executing a specific lock (for example, game start lock execution processing by the main CPU 51) and the internal winning combination determination means determine the specific internal winning combination, and the stop operation is predetermined. Is performed in the order of (for example, pushing order for additional lock), and based on that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "middle-stage replay") is stopped by the symbol variation stop control means on the symbol display means. A main control unit including a predetermined lock execution unit (for example, a game end lock execution process by the main CPU 51) for executing a predetermined lock (for example, a lock based on lock data after all stop) for invalidating a game operation by a person (For example, the main CPU 51) and the gaming state is controlled by the gaming state transition control means to the second gaming state. A sub control unit (for example, the sub CPU 81) including a sub effect unit (for example, a start command reception process by the sub CPU 81) for notifying information of advantageous stop operation related to the addition of the game medium by the notification unit, The specific transition condition is that the main effect means performs an effect in a specific symbol variation mode (for example, reel actions 5 to 8 are executed), and the predetermined lock execution means causes the predetermined lock. When a game is executed, a specific profit that gives the player a specific profit (for example, determination of an AT number addition value, transition to the pseudo-probability variation state) different from the profit to shift the game state to the first game state. A gaming machine further provided with a granting means (for example, a sub CPU 81, a main CPU 51).

  Further, the specific profit giving means, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means in the second game state, the information of the stop operation by the sub effect means as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized by giving a benefit of increasing the number of times of notification (for example, determination of an AT number addition value under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  Further, the specific profit giving means, in the second game state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock execution means, as the specific profit, the game state from the second game state to the third A gaming machine characterized by imparting a profit for shifting to a gaming state (for example, shifting to a production gaming state "pseudo-probability variation state" under the control of the main CPU 51).

  According to this gaming machine, in the chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1") where the lock is easily executed, depending on the type of the effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode executed when the lock is executed. By shifting to an advantageous game state (for example, AT game), the expectation can be significantly improved.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the transition to the chance zone state is not appropriate (for example, during AT game or AT preparation), a specific internal winning combination that triggers the transition to the chance zone state (for example, If you win "Strong Chance Rip"), you can prevent the game contents from becoming difficult to understand by not shifting to the chance zone state, and by giving different profits, you can win a specific internal winning combination. You can enjoy the benefits that you made.

  A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) that variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a reel normal control unit that normally controls the plurality of reels to advance a game (for example, a normal by the main CPU 51 Reel control processing), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, reel effect determination means (for example, lock lottery processing by the main CPU 51) that determines the type of effect according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels, and the symbols of the plurality of reels A gaming machine provided with reel effect control means (for example, reel effect control processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling effect (for example, reel action) according to a variation mode, wherein the reel effect control means determines the reel effect determination. The excitation output selection data corresponds to each of the plurality of reels according to the type of effect determined by the means. Reel effect selection data determination means for determining the reel effect selection data (for example, the process of S276 in the reel effect control processing under the control of the main CPU 51), and the reel determined by the reel effect selection data determination means. Based on the effect selection data, the type of the excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the reel are determined, or at least indicates that the effect symbol position, which is the symbol position for starting the effect on the reel, should be adjusted. By the excitation output selection data determining means (for example, the processing of S277 in the reel effect control processing under the control of the main CPU 51) for determining the type of the pattern position adjustment data as the excitation output selection data, and the excitation output selection data determining means. , The symbol position adjustment data as the excitation output selection data When determined, the production symbol position adjusting means (for example, reel production adjustment output processing by the main CPU51) for adjusting the production symbol position, and, the production symbol position adjusting means, the symbol position adjustment data The excitation output table is selected according to the type and the effect symbol position (for example, the process of S294, the process of S297, the process of S300, and the process of S308 in the reel effect adjustment output process under the control of the main CPU 51 are executed. By doing), the game machine characterized in that the effect symbol position is adjusted.

  According to this gaming machine, when the excitation output table is determined as the excitation output selection data, the excitation output control is performed using the excitation output table, and the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the excitation output selection data. If so, the excitation output table is selected according to the type of the pattern position adjustment data and the effect symbol position, and the excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table. The symbol position of the reel can be adjusted only when it is desired to perform the effect according to the symbol variation mode of the reel in the state where the symbols (for example, the "red 7" symbol) are aligned, and thus the effect according to the symbol variation mode of the reel is started. Even if there is a deviation in the symbol position of the reel during the performance of the front or reel symbol variation mode, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control load. Te, it is possible to enjoy the effects by symbol variation aspect of intended reels to the player.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, by the main CPU 51). Internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control unit (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit, and displayed on the symbol display unit. Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means. And a profit giving means for giving a profit according to a combination of stopped symbols (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 81) for controlling the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition. And, controlling the start and end of the output of the first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous game state control means has controlled the advantageous game state, and by the advantageous game state control means External signal output control means (for example, external signal output management processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling the start and end of output of a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating that the advantageous gaming state has continued, The external signal output control means is based on that a predetermined output start condition is satisfied (for example, the normal game winning number counter is 3). Then, based on that only the first external signal is output in a unit game different from the unit game in which the output of the first external signal is started and the output of the first external signal is started. , When the output of the second external signal is started and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, a specific output end condition is satisfied (for example, AT game winning prize) When the output of the second external signal is terminated and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, the predetermined number A gaming machine characterized by terminating the output of the first external signal and the second external signal based on that an output end condition is satisfied (for example, the AT end counter has become 2).

  According to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that it has been controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) and the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) have continued. Since the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) indicating the is output, the number of initial hits and the number of continuations of the advantageous game state, which is of great interest to the player, are appropriately displayed on the external display or the like. be able to.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) is controlled, and the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming) are continued. Since the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) indicating that the output has been made is output at different timings with a simple configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load on the external display side, communication error, etc. It is also possible to reduce the occurrence of.

  Further, the predetermined output start condition is a condition whose establishment comes later than the predetermined start condition (for example, the start of an AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81), and the specific output end condition is the predetermined output end condition. A game machine characterized in that its establishment comes later than the end condition (for example, the end of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81).

  According to this gaming machine, the start and end of the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) is notified by the notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like) controlled by the sub control circuit rather than the display by the external display or the like. Since it is possible to notify the player as soon as possible by the notification, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player who is playing the game.

  Also, a difference number management means (for example, an AT management difference number counter) for managing the difference number in the advantageous gaming state, and a winning number management means (for example, AT for managing the number of winnings of a specific small winning combination in the advantageous gaming state). Management difference sheet counter), and the predetermined end condition is that the difference sheet number managed by the difference sheet number managing means has become a predetermined number (for example, 0 or less), and the specific output. The ending condition is that the number of winnings managed by the winning number managing means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 38 times).

  According to this gaming machine, in particular, the number of times the AT game is continued (one set) can be appropriately displayed with a simple configuration.

  Based on a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a player's start operation (for example, operation to start lever 16) Then, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51), and a symbol variation start control for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation. Means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51), and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the player's stop operation (for example, operation to stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for stopping fluctuation of the symbol, and the symbol fluctuation When the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the stop control unit, a profit giving unit (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that gives a profit according to the stopped combination of symbols is provided. , The internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation sequence (eg, "middle left and right"), a combination of the first symbols (eg, 7 push-up correct answers rising to the right) And a first internal winning combination (for example, center left and right bell A) that is displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation is performed in a second stop operation sequence (for example, "right left middle"). In the case of, a second combination of symbols (for example, 7 pieces in the pushing order correct answer middle row) will be displayed on the symbol display means, and a second internal winning combination (for example, right-left middle bell B) and the stop. The operations are performed in the first stop operation sequence. In this case, the third internal winning combination (for example, the middle left and right bell C) that will display a third combination of symbols (for example, the bottom 7 in the pressing order, correct answer) on the symbol display means, and the stop operation. However, when performed in the second stop operation sequence, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, right-left center bell C), in which the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means, The internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, a coefficient “750”). The third internal winning combination and the fourth internal winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination with the second probability (for example, the coefficient “250”) lower than the first probability, and the profit giving means is The combination of the first symbol, the combination of the second symbol and the combination of the third symbol are A game machine characterized in that a predetermined profit (for example, payout of seven medals), which is the same profit, is given when displayed on the symbol display means.

  In addition, the first internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the first stop operation order (for example, "right left middle"), to the timing of the stop operation. Accordingly, one of a plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one pressed position correct answer) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the second internal winning combination is , When the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the second stop operation order (for example, "middle left and right"), depending on the timing of the stop operation, a plurality of the fourth symbols One of the combinations (for example, one pressed position correct answer) is an internal winning combination that is displayed on the symbol display means, and the third internal winning combination is the first internal winning combination. The stop operation sequence is different from In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any one of the plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one question) is an internal winning combination that is displayed on the symbol display means, The fourth internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the second stop operation order, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, a plurality of the fourth symbols Any of the combinations (for example, one unquestioned) is an internal winning combination that will be displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means, the profit combination means, the combination of the fourth symbol to the symbol display means A game machine characterized in that, when displayed, a specific profit less than the predetermined profit (for example, payout of one medal) is given.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent monotonous results (combinations of displayed symbols) when the stop operation order is correct, even when a plurality of push order small wins are defined. .

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even when a plurality of push-order small winning combinations are defined, the number of internal winning combinations is reduced to reduce the data volume and the control load of the internal lottery processing. be able to.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if a plurality of push-order small winning combinations are defined, by reducing the number of internal winning combinations, it becomes easy to equally assign a desired lottery value. It also contributes to the design and ease of design.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a start switch). 16S), a stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player (for example, a stop switch 17S), and an internal winning combination determining portion based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. A winning symbol determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and a symbol variation that starts a variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means Based on the detection of the stop operation, within the range of a predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 symbols), the symbol variation stop control for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, either cherry lip or strong cherry lip is determined as an internal winning combination). Based on the main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) that performs an effect (for example, a special reel action) in the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, the effect in the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means. Sometimes, a lock starting means (for example, the main CPU 51) for starting a lock for invalidating a game operation by the player, and the lock start The lock is started by the step, and the lock operation is determined by the stop operation detecting means, and the lock operation is determined by the lock operation determining means (for example, the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 77). (Game start lock execution process), and based on the lock period determined by the lock period determination means has elapsed, lock end means (for example, the main CPU51) to end the lock, and the symbol The fluctuation stop control means, when the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination means is continued until the lock is terminated by the lock termination means. Even if the lock is terminated by the lock termination means (for example, the step of FIG. 78). In S574, it is determined that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit based on the determination that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (for example, step S576 in FIG. 78). In, based on the output request of the special on-edge signal is made), the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped.

  Further, the lock period determination means, based on the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, a pseudo stop start position) when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the lock A game machine characterized by determining a period.

  Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a start switch). 16S), a stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by the player (for example, a stop switch 17S), and an internal winning combination determining portion based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. A winning symbol determination means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and a symbol variation that starts a variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation being detected by the start operation detecting means. Start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation detection means Based on the detection of the stop operation, within the range of a predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 symbols), the symbol variation stop control for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and that the specific internal winning combination has been determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, as the internal winning combination, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) Based on the fact that any of the above has been determined), a main production means (for example, the main CPU 51) that performs an effect (for example, a special reel action) in the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means, and the main effect means. When the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed by the lock start means for starting the lock for invalidating the game operation by the player (for example, Based on the fact that the lock is started by the in-CPU 51) and the lock starting means, and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, a specific combination forming a symbol related to the specific internal winning combination is formed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means and the position of the design (for example, the design position where the design position data is 12 and 17) in which the design (for example, "cherry" design) is displayed on the design display means The lock period determining means (for example, shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51, which determines the lock period during which the lock continues in accordance with the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the pseudo stop start position). Based on the fact that the lock execution process at the start of a game) and the lock period determined by the lock period determining means have elapsed, And a lock end means (for example, the main CPU 51) for terminating the lock, the symbol fluctuation stop control means, the stop operation by the stop operation detection means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination means. Even if the detection of is continued until the lock is ended by the lock end means, the fact that the lock is ended by the lock end means (for example, in step S574 of FIG. 78, the special control flag is It is determined that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means based on that it is turned on and the effect timer is determined to be 0 (for example, in step S576 of FIG. 78, output of a special on-edge signal). (Based on the request is made), the specific symbol at the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means Gaming machine, characterized in that stop variation.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed by using the effect (for example, a special reel action) in the symbol variation mode. Even when the number of frames is set to 4, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest of the stop operation.

  According to this gaming machine, a combination of symbols relating to a specific internal winning combination (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) (for example, a combination of symbols relating to cherry lip A "cherry-ANY-ANY") Since it is possible to easily stop the constituent symbols (for example, the "cherry" symbol on the reel 3L), the player can easily perceive that a specific internal winning combination has been established, and thus the game. It is possible to remarkably improve the interest of.

  In addition, based on that the main production means produces an effect in the pattern variation mode, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect (for example, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 79) that notifies that the stop operation should be continued is provided. It is characterized by further comprising a performance executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to surely enjoy an effect (for example, a special reel action) in a symbol variation mode that can give the player an impression as if the maximum number of sliding pieces was changed.

  Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means and the like included in the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the present embodiment described above, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are used as the symbol display means, but a liquid crystal display device is used instead of or together with the reels. May be That is, the image of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variably displayed. Further, the display window may be a single display window 4, and the display window 4 may display a part of the symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 56 and performs the internal lottery process. However, instead of this, Alternatively, along with this, a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 51 may be used to acquire the random number value.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, a start switch 16S that detects an operation to the start lever 16 is adopted as a start operation detection unit that detects a start operation of the player, and a stop that detects a stop operation of the player is stopped. As the operation detecting means, the stop switch 17S that detects an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is adopted, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or together with the stop switch 17S.

Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 51 or the sub CPU 81 shown in the present embodiment appropriately change their management modes without departing from the spirit of the present invention. be able to. For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”, and in this case, the determination as to whether or not “to or more” is “to or less”. It is to be read as a determination as to whether or not the above, and a determination as to whether or not "exceeds" is read as a determination as to whether or not "less than".
Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”, and in this case, the determination as to whether or not “up to” is “˜ It is to be read as a determination of whether or not "greater than or equal to" and a determination of whether or not "less than" is to be read as a determination of whether or not "greater than".

  Further, for example, various counters managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the scope of the present invention. The various counters managed by the control may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, for example, various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The various game states managed by the control of the CPU 81 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  It should be noted that all the inventions described in the present embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to all pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and other game machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4L, 4C, 4R Display window 16 Start lever 16S Start switch 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 17S Stop switch 41 Main control circuit 42 Sub control circuit 51 Main CPU
53 Main RAM
81 Sub CPU
83 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination based on a player's start operation,
Based on the stop operation of the player, the symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbols according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means,
When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the first game state, and when the specific transition condition is satisfied in the first game state, the game state is changed to the first game state. Game state transition control means for shifting from the second game state,
Lock execution means capable of executing a lock for invalidating a game operation by a player in the first game state;
A symbol effect executing unit capable of executing a symbol effect in a variable display mode of the symbol while the lock is performed by the lock executing unit,
A symbol effect determining means for determining the symbol effect executed by the symbol effect executing means,
In the first gaming state, the symbol effect determination means can determine a symbol effect executed from a plurality of symbol effects including at least a specific symbol effect and a predetermined symbol effect,
The game state transition control means,
In the first gaming state, when it is decided to execute the specific symbol effect, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state,
In the first gaming state, when it is decided to execute the predetermined symbol effect, the first gaming state is a high probability state in which it is easy to decide to execute the specific symbol effect,
The specific symbol effect is executed in the next game of the unit game in which it is decided to execute the effect, and the first symbol effect is executed in the unit game in which it is decided to execute the effect. Including the design effect of 2,
A game machine characterized in that the symbol effect determination means is not capable of determining to execute the second symbol effect in the final game of the first game state.

Images